JP2019010259A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of imparting variation to operational feeling.SOLUTION: In each operation in every direction of a push-in operation (operation to a first direction) of a holding unit 330 and of a rotation operation (operation to a second direction which is a different direction from the first direction) of the holding unit 330, the holding unit 330 (member 344 to be guided) is displaced from a first position (first end 351) to a second position (second end 351f). Namely, the kind of operation can be selected optionally by a player. As the result, variation can be imparted to operational feeling.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 22

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  A gaming machine provided with an operator is known (Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-29609 A

  However, the gaming machine exemplified above has a problem that the operational feeling is monotonous.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of giving variations to the operational feeling.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes an operation element formed to be displaceable from the first position to the second position by the player's operation, and is operated in the first direction. Alternatively, the operation element is displaced from the first position to the second position in any of the operations in the second direction, which is a direction different from the first direction.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the operating element is formed to be displaceable from the second position to the third position, and the operating element is operated by the operation in the second direction. The second position is displaced from the second position to the third position, and the operation in the first direction restricts the displacement of the operation element from the second position to the third position.

  A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the operation element is formed to be displaceable from the second position to the third position, and both the first direction and the second direction are The operation element is displaced from the second position to the third position by an operation in the third direction, which is a different direction. In the operation in the first direction and the second direction, the second operation of the operation element is performed. Displacement from the position to the third position is restricted.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to give variations to the operation feeling.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, the operation can be complicated.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the first aspect, it is possible to suppress the operation feeling from becoming monotonous.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the slot machine in the first embodiment. It is a perspective front view of the slot machine in a state where the front door is closed. It is a perspective front view of the slot machine in a state where the front door is opened. It is a perspective rear view of the front door in the state where the reel unit is opened from the front door to the back side. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing | casing. It is a disassembled perspective view of a frame unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows a symbol arrangement | sequence. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of a selector. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the slot machine. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a front door. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a front door. (A) is a front view of a displacement unit, (b) is a side view of the displacement unit in the XIIIb direction of FIG. 13 (a), (c) is a XIIIc-XIIIc line of FIG. 13 (a). It is a cross-sectional model drawing of the displacement unit in. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a displacement unit. (A) is a front view of an operation unit, (b) is a side view of the operation unit in the XVIb direction view of FIG. 16 (a), and (c) is a rear view of the operation unit. (A) is a perspective front view of an operation unit, (b) is a perspective rear view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a holding unit. (A) is a front view of a guide unit, (b) is a perspective front view of the guide unit, (c) is a perspective rear view of the guide unit, and (d) is a perspective view of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the guide unit in the XXd-XXd line | wire of (). (A) is a disassembled perspective front view of a guide unit, (b) is an exploded sectional view of a guide unit. (A) is a perspective front view of the operation unit and the guide unit, (b) is a front view of the operation unit and the guide unit, and (c) is XXIIc- of FIG. 22 (b). It is sectional drawing of the operation unit in a XXIIc line, and a guide unit, (d) is sectional drawing of the operation unit in the XXIId-XXIId line of Fig.22 (a). (A) is a perspective front view of the operation unit and the guide unit, (b) is a front view of the operation unit and the guide unit, and (c) is XXIIIc- of FIG. 23 (b). It is sectional drawing of the operation unit in XXIIIc line, and a guide unit, (d) is sectional drawing of the operation unit in XXIIId-XXIIId line of Fig.23 (a). (A) is a perspective front view of an operation unit and a guide unit, (b) is a front view of an operation unit and a guide unit, and (c) is XXIVc- of FIG. 24 (b). It is sectional drawing of the operation unit and guide unit in the XXIVc line, (d) is sectional drawing of the operation unit and guide unit in the XXIVd-XXIVd line of Fig.24 (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of an operation unit and a guide unit. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of an operation unit and a guide unit. (A) is a front view of the base unit, (b) is a perspective front view of the base unit, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the base unit taken along line XXVIIc-XXVIIc in FIG. 27 (a). . It is a disassembled perspective front view of a base unit. (A) is a front view of the base unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the base unit along the line XXIXb-XXIXb in FIG. 29 (a). (A) is a front view of a displacement unit, (b) is a rear view of a displacement unit, (c) is sectional drawing of the displacement unit in the XXXc-XXXc line | wire of Fig.30 (a). It is a front view of a base unit. (A) is a partial cross-sectional schematic view of the base unit taken along line XXXIIa-XXXIIa in FIG. 31, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional schematic view of the base unit taken along line XXXIIb-XXXIIb in FIG. 31. (A) is a partial cross-sectional schematic view of the base unit taken along line XXXIIIa-XXXIIIa in FIG. 27 (a), and (b) is a partial cross-sectional schematic view of the base unit taken along line XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb in FIG. 27 (a). FIG. It is a perspective exploded view of a displacement unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of the base unit. It is a front view of a base unit. It is a partial enlarged front view of a base unit. It is a partial enlarged front view of a base unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of a base unit in the second embodiment. (A) to (c) are schematic cross-sectional views of the base unit taken along line XLa-XLa in FIG. 39 (a). (A) is a front view of the base unit in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the base unit in the XLIb-XLIb line | wire of Fig.41 (a), (c) is FIG.41. It is a cross-sectional model drawing of the base unit in the XLIc-XLIc line of (a). (A) is a front view of the base unit in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the base unit in the XLIIb-XLIIb line | wire of Fig.42 (a). (A) is a front view of the base unit in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the base unit in the XLIIIb-XLIIIb line | wire of Fig.43 (a). (A) is a front view of the displacement unit, (b) is a rear view of the displacement unit, and (c) is a sectional view of the displacement unit of XLIVc-XLIVc in FIG. 44 (a). (A) to (c) is a front view of the base unit. (A)-(c) is sectional drawing of the base unit in the XLVIa-XLVIa line of Fig.45 (a), (d) is sectional drawing of the base unit in the XLVId-XLVId line of Fig.46 (a). is there. (E) is sectional drawing of the base unit in the XLVIe-XLVIe line | wire of Fig.46 (a). (A) is a front view of the base unit in 6th Embodiment, (b) is a front view of a base unit, (c) is a base unit in the XLVIIc-XLVIIc line of FIG. 47 (b). FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the base unit in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a disassembled perspective front view of the operation unit in 8th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of an operation unit and a guide unit. (A) is a front view of the operation unit and the guide unit, (b) is a side view of the operation unit and the guide unit, and (c) is a cross section of the operation unit and the guide unit. FIG. (A) is a front view of the operation unit and the guide unit, (b) is a side view of the operation unit and the guide unit, and (c) is a cross section of the operation unit and the guide unit. FIG. (A) is a front view of the operation unit and the guide unit, (b) is a side view of the operation unit and the guide unit, and (c) is a cross section of the operation unit and the guide unit. FIG. (A) is a front view of the operation unit and the guide unit, (b) is a side view of the operation unit and the guide unit, and (c) is a cross section of the operation unit and the guide unit. FIG. (A) to (c) is a schematic sectional view of an operation unit and a guide unit in the ninth embodiment. (A) is a side view of the operation unit in 10th Embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the operation unit in the LVb-LVb line | wire of Fig.55 (a). It is a disassembled perspective view of a holding unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of an operation unit and a guide unit, (c) And (d) is sectional drawing of an operation unit. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation unit and a guide unit, (c) And (d) is sectional drawing of an operation unit. (A) is a front view of the guide unit in 11th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the guide unit in the LIXb-LIXb line | wire of Fig.59 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the guide unit in 12th Embodiment, (b) is an exploded sectional view of a guide unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the guide unit in 13th Embodiment, (b) is an exploded sectional view of the guide unit in 13th Embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing of the guide unit in 14th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the guide unit in 15th Embodiment.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 38, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective front view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, and FIG. 3 is a perspective front view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open. FIG. 4 is a perspective rear view of the front door 12 with the reel unit 41 opened from the front door 12 to the back side. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the front door 12, and FIG. 6 is a front view of the housing 11. In FIG. 1, a state in which the game panel 30 disposed on the front side of the auxiliary display unit 15 is removed is illustrated. In FIG. 1, each effective line display unit 32, 33, and 34 to be described later is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  Further, in the following description, the front side of the paper will be described as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper will be described as the rear (back) side with respect to the slot machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. Further, with respect to the slot machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is left (left) ) Side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-back direction of the slot machine 10, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 6, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, the housing 11 includes a top plate 11a, a bottom plate 11b, a back plate 11c, a left side plate 11d, and a right side plate 11e formed in a wooden plate shape, and adjacent plates 11a. 11e to 11e are fixed by fixing means such as adhesion, and as a whole, a box-like shape with one surface on the front side (arrow F direction side) opened is formed. In addition, you may comprise each board 11a-11e by forming in a box shape with a synthetic resin material or a metal material besides comprising with a wooden panel. The casing 11 configured as described above is attached by, for example, driving nails against a so-called island facility at the time of installation in the game hall.

  Further, on the bottom plate 11 b of the housing 11, a metal metal plate 11 b 1 made of a plate-like body is disposed on the inner surface on the open side (arrow F direction side) of the housing 11. Thereby, when the front door 12 to be described later is disposed on the front (open) side of the casing 11, a part of the front door 12 can be mounted on the metal plate 11b1, and in this case, the casing 11 It is possible to suppress the bottom plate 11b from rubbing and becoming brittle. Further, by placing a part of the front door 12 on the front side of the metal plate 11b1, the front door 12 can be supported by the bottom surface 11b of the housing 11 (that is, the metal plate 11b1 can be used as reinforcement). ). Thereby, it can suppress that the support shafts 25a and 25b of the housing | casing 11 mentioned later and the support metal fittings 26a and 26b of the front door 12 are damaged.

  A front door 12 as a front opening / closing door is attached to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the left side plate 11d of the casing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 25a and 25b as shown in FIG. Each of the support shafts 25a and 25b includes a tapered shaft portion that protrudes upward. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5, the front door 12 is provided with support brackets 26a and 26b having shaft support holes into which shaft portions of the support shafts 25a and 25b are inserted corresponding to the shafts 25a and 25b. It has been. Then, by placing the support fittings 26a and 26b above the respective support shafts 25a and 25b and lowering the front door 12, the shaft portions of the support shafts 25a and 25b are inserted into the insertion holes of the support fittings 26a and 26b. It is assumed that it was done. Thus, the front door 12 is supported so as to be rotatable about an opening / closing axis extending in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) connecting the both support shafts 25a and 25b to the casing 11, and the casing is thereby rotated. The front open side of 11 can be opened or closed.

  In the following description, the state where the front door 12 is closed with respect to the housing 11 (the state where the front door 12 is disposed on the open surface of the housing 11) as shown in FIG. A state in which the front door 12 is opened with respect to the housing 11 as shown in FIG. 3 (a state in which the open surface of the housing 11 is opened) will be described as an open state. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the front door 12 is described as being closed with respect to the housing 11.

  The front door 12 is brought into a locked state that cannot be opened by a locking device provided on the back surface thereof. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 1, the key cylinder 20 of the unlocking operation part is provided in the lower part (arrow D direction part) of the right end side (arrow R direction side) of the front door 12. As shown in FIG. The key cylinder 20 is integrated with the locking device, and is configured such that the locked state is unlocked by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 20. Therefore, an outline of the lock mechanism including the locking device will be described.

  On the right end side of the front door 12, that is, on the side opposite to the opening / closing axis of the front door 12 (arrow R direction side), a locking device is provided on the back surface thereof. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 5, the locking device includes a base frame that extends in the vertical direction and is fixed to the front door 12, and a key cylinder 20 that extends from the upper part of the base frame to the front of the front door 12. And a long interlocking rod 21 assembled so as to be movable in the vertical direction with respect to the base frame. And only the key cylinder 20 is provided in the state which protruded ahead of the front door 12 among the locking devices. In the present embodiment, Omlock (trade name) having a high function of preventing unauthorized unlocking is used as the key cylinder 20.

  The interlocking rod 21 is moved downward by operating the key inserted into the key cylinder 20 clockwise. The interlocking saddle 21 is provided with a pair of upper and lower saddle fittings 22 having a bowl shape. When the front door 12 is closed with respect to the casing 11 (closed state), the saddle fitting 22 is on the casing 11 side. Is locked to the support bracket 23 (see FIG. 6). In addition, the urging member 22 is provided with an urging member such as a coil spring for urging to the side maintaining the locked state. When the key is operated clockwise with respect to the key cylinder 20, the interlocking rod 21 moves downward, and the saddle fitting 22 is moved against the biasing force of the biasing member. The locked state with the support fitting 23 is released, and the locked state of the front door 12 with respect to the housing 11 is released.

  Auxiliary display unit 15 is disposed above the center of front door 12 (in the direction of arrow U), and a reel unit 41 is provided below auxiliary display unit 15 via game panel 30 (see FIG. 1). . In the following description, an area in which the reel unit 41 is visible from the lower side of the liquid crystal frame member 600 (see FIG. 12) where the auxiliary display unit 15 is disposed via the game panel 30 is referred to as “visible area”. Called.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the reel unit 41 is attached to the inside of a frame unit 45 formed by combining a plurality of plate members in a frame shape. In addition, a speaker 46 that outputs sound is disposed above the frame unit 45. The speaker 46 is disposed with the sound output surface facing the back side, and the sound output from the speaker 46 is reflected inside the housing 11. Thereby, a sound can be transmitted to the player from the entire slot machine 10, and it is easy to give the player interest by sound.

  On the left side (arrow L direction side) of the frame unit 45, a pair of upper and lower second support shafts 45a and 45b are provided (see FIG. 7). The second support shafts 45a and 45b include tapered shaft portions that protrude downward. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5, the front door 12 is provided with support brackets 26c and 26d having shaft support holes into which the shaft portions of the support shafts 45a and 45b are inserted corresponding to the shafts 45a and 45b. It has been. The shafts 45a and 45b are inserted into the insertion holes of the support fittings 26c and 26d by lowering the frame unit 45 after arranging the support shafts 45a and 45b above the support fittings 26c and 26d. It is assumed that it was done. Thereby, the frame unit 45 is supported so as to be rotatable about an opening / closing axis line (parallel) along the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) connecting the both support shafts 45a and 45b to the front door 12. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 4, by rotating the front door 12 forward (arrow F direction side) with respect to the housing 11 and then rotating the frame unit 45 to the back side (arrow B direction side), The front side of the frame unit 45 (reel unit 41) can be opened.

  The reel unit 41 includes a left reel 42L, a middle reel 42M, and a right reel 42R each formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape). The reels 42L, 42M, and 42R may be configured as at least an endless belt, and are not limited to a cylindrical shape (annular shape). Each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is rotatably supported so that the central axis thereof is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are disposed on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction. When the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R rotate forward, the surface of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is visually recognized by the player through the game panel 30 as if moving from the top to the bottom.

  Each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is coupled to the stepping motors 61L, 61M, and 61R, and each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is individually, that is, independently, driven by the stepping motors 61L, 61M, and 61R. Thus, it can be rotationally driven. Since these reels 42L, 42M, and 42R have the same configuration, the right reel 42R will be described as an example here with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the frame unit 45.

  The right reel 42R includes a cylindrical skeleton member 50 that forms a cage on a cylinder, and a belt-like belt wound endlessly on the outer peripheral surface thereof. And it is attached to the cylindrical skeleton member 50 through a pair of seal parts formed along both long sides of the belt so as to maintain the wound state. A large number of symbols as identification information are printed at equal intervals on the outer peripheral surface of the belt. A boss portion 51 is formed at the center of the cylindrical skeleton member 50, and is attached to the drive shaft of the right reel stepping motor 61R via a disc-like boss reinforcing plate 52. Accordingly, when the drive shaft of the stepping motor 61R for the right reel rotates, the cylindrical skeleton member 50 rotates about the drive shaft so that the right reel 42R circulates along the reel surface on the ring. It has become.

  The right reel stepping motor 61R is fixed to the side surface of the motor plate 53 arranged in an upright state in the reel unit 41 (FIG. 4) with screws 54. The motor plate 53 is provided with a reel index sensor (rotational position detection sensor) 55 in which a light emitting element 55a and a light receiving element 55b are held at a predetermined interval. On the other hand, a base end portion 56b of a sensor cut bun 56 extending in the radial direction is fixed to the boss reinforcing plate 52 integrated with the right reel 42R by a screw 57. The front end portion 56a of the sensor cut bun 56 is bent at a substantially right angle and is positioned so as to pass between both elements 55a and 55b of the reel index sensor 55. Each time the left reel 42R makes one rotation, the reel index sensor 55 detects the passage of the front end portion 56a of the sensor cut bun 56, and a detection signal is output to the main controller 131 described later each time the detection is made. Therefore, main controller 131 can confirm and correct the angular position of left reel 42L for each rotation based on this detection signal.

  The stepping motor 61R is set to rotate once by giving, for example, a drive signal of 504 pulses (also referred to as an excitation signal or an excitation pulse; the same applies hereinafter), and the rotation position of the stepping motor 61R, that is, the left position is determined by this excitation pulse. The rotational position of the reel 42L is controlled.

  On each belt of each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, a plurality of, specifically, 21 symbols are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction). Therefore, 24 pulses (= 504 pulses ÷ 21 symbols) are required to switch from one symbol to the next symbol at a predetermined position. Then, the number of pulses from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor 55 is output recognizes which symbol is visible from the visible region, or allows any symbol to be visually recognized from the visible region. It is possible to perform control for recognizing whether or not an arbitrary symbol is visible from a visible region.

  Of the symbols attached to the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, the number of symbols that can be visually recognized through the game panel 30 from below the liquid crystal frame member 600, which will be described later, is mainly based on the vertical length of the visible region. It is limited to a predetermined number to be determined. In this embodiment, three reels are provided. For this reason, when all the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols are visible to the player.

  Here, the symbols attached to the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R will be described. FIG. 8 shows a symbol array drawn on the belt wound around each of the left reel 42L, the middle reel 42M, and the right reel 42R. As shown in the figure, each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is provided with 21 symbols in a row. Although numbers 1 to 21 are assigned to the respective reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, these are given for convenience of explanation, and are not actually attached to the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R. . However, in the following description, the number is used for explanation.

  As the symbols, there are a “7” symbol (for example, the left belt 20th) and a “youth” symbol (for example, the left belt 19th) as the first special symbol for shifting to the big bonus game. In addition, there is a “BAR” symbol (for example, the 14th left belt) as the second special symbol for shifting to the regular bonus game. In addition, there is a “replay” symbol (for example, the eleventh left belt) as a third special symbol for the next game to shift to a replay game that can be executed without inserting medals. In addition, a “watermelon” symbol (for example, the left belt ninth), a “bell” symbol (for example, the left belt eighth), and a “cherry” symbol (for example, left) as the small character symbols from which the small character is paid out. Belt 4th). As shown in FIG. 7, the number of various symbols and the arrangement order are completely different in the belt wound around each reel 42L, 42M, 42R.

  Each of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R of the reel unit 41 is an example of a display device that variably displays identification information, and the display device may have a configuration other than this. For example, other mechanical reel configurations such as a type in which the belt is rotated instead of rotating may be used, and instead of or in addition to the mechanical reel configuration, a liquid crystal display or a dot matrix display It is also possible to provide a display that displays the identification information in a variable manner by electrical display such as, and in this case, it is possible to provide a variety of display forms.

  The game panel 30 has a total of five combination lines, three in parallel in the horizontal direction and two in the diagonal direction so as to tie the symbols of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R that are visible from the visible region. Is attached. Of course, the maximum number of combined lines may be 6 or more, or less than 5, and the maximum number of combined lines may be changed according to a predetermined condition. Corresponding to each of these combination lines, each effective line display section 32, 33, 34 is provided. The first effective line display unit 32 is notified by lighting or the like when the central horizontal line (center line) of the combination lines is activated. The second effective line display unit 33 is notified by lighting or the like when the upper and lower horizontal lines (upper line and lower line) of the combination lines are activated. The third effective line display unit 34 is notified by lighting or the like when a pair of diagonal lines (lower right line and upper right line) of the combination lines is enabled. A winning is awarded when the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the activated combination line, that is, on the activated line, and a predetermined medal payout process, a transition process to a specific game, and the like are executed.

  In this embodiment, when each effective line display section 32, 33, 34 is activated, it corresponds to each effective line by an issuing device such as an LED disposed on the motor plate 53 of the reel unit 41. The part that performs is emitted.

  Here, the payout number regarding each symbol when winning is explained. Regarding the small role design, when the “Watermelon” design is aligned with the left, middle and right on the active line, 15 medals are paid out. When the “Bell” design is aligned with the left, middle and right on the effective line Pays out 8 medals, and when the “cherry” symbol on the left reel 42L stops on the active line, 2 medals are paid out. That is, the “cherry” symbols on the middle reel 42M and the right reel 42R are irrelevant to the medal payout. In addition, for the “cherry” symbol, the medal payout is performed regardless of the combination with other symbols, and therefore, a plurality of effective lines of the left reel 42L overlap (specifically, the upper or lower row) with “ When the “cherry” symbol is stopped, medals are paid out by multiplying the number of overlapping active lines. As a result, in this embodiment, four medals are paid out.

  As for other symbols, when the “7” symbol or “youth” symbol, which is a combination of the first special symbol (big bonus symbol), is aligned with the left, middle and right on the active line in the same symbol The 15 medals are also paid out when the “BAR” symbol which is a combination of 15 medal payouts and the second special symbol (regular bonus symbol) is aligned with the left, middle and right on the active line. In the present embodiment, for example, a case where the “7” symbol and the “cherry” symbol are established simultaneously may occur, but in this case, 15 medals are paid out. This is because the upper limit number for one medal payout is set to 15.

  Further, when the “replay” symbol, which is the combination of the third special symbol, is aligned with the left, middle, and right on the active line, the medal payout is not performed. In other cases, that is, when the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 42L does not stop on the active line, and the same symbol as the left, middle, and right does not align on the active line, it will be missed. Is not done.

  On the lower left side of the game panel 30, as shown in FIG. 1, a start lever 71 is provided that is operated to start rotation of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R all at once (not necessarily simultaneously). . The start lever 71 constitutes start operation means for starting the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R, that is, for starting operation to start the symbol variation display. The start lever 71 is a lever that is pushed by a hand when the player starts a game (game), and automatically returns to the original position after the hand is released by a built-in spring. When the start lever 71 is operated while a medal is inserted, the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R start to rotate all at once.

  On the right side of the start lever 71, as shown in FIG. 1, button-like stop switches 72, 73, 74 operated to individually stop the rotating reels 42L, 42M, 42R are provided. Yes. The stop switches 72, 73, and 74 are respectively disposed directly below the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R to be stopped. The stop switches 72, 73, and 74 constitute stop operation means that are operated to stop the change display based on the rotation of the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R. Each of the stop switches 72, 73, 74 can be stopped when a predetermined time elapses after the left reel 42L starts rotating, and is stopped by lighting a lamp (not shown) during such a state. It is notified that the operation is possible, and is turned off when the rotation stops.

  On the lower right side of the visible area, as shown in FIG. 1, there is provided a medal slot 75 for inserting medals as game media for playing a game. The medal slot 75 constitutes a receiving port that can receive game media. Further, if attention is paid to the point that the medal insertion slot 75 involves an operation of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 75 constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting game media.

  As shown in FIG. 4, medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 75 are guided to either the storage passage 81 or the discharge passage 82 by the selector 83 provided on the back surface of the front door 12. The selector 83 is provided with a medal passage switching member 84 to be described later, so that the medal passage direction is switched between the discharge passage 82 side and the storage passage 81 side according to the state of the medal passage switching member 84. It has become. The medal guided to the storage passage 81 is guided to the hopper device 91 housed in the housing 11. On the other hand, the medal guided to the discharge passage 82 is guided to the medal tray 18 from the medal discharge port 17 provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

  A hopper device 91 as a payout means for giving a medal to a player is disposed below the reel unit 41 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the hopper device 91 includes a storage tank 92 that stores medals and a payout device 93 that pays out medals to the player. The payout device 93 discharges medals to an opening 94 provided at the center right portion of the discharge passage 82 and pays out medals to the medal tray 18 through the discharge passage 82.

  On the right side of the hopper device 91, as shown in FIG. 6, a reserve tank 95 is provided to avoid storing a predetermined amount or more of medals in the storage tank 92. A guide plate 96 for discharging medals from the storage tank 92 to the reserve tank 95 is provided inside the storage tank 92 of the hopper device 91. Therefore, when medals are stored more than the height at which the guide plate 96 is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank 95.

  A button-like return switch 76 is provided below the medal slot 75 as shown in FIG. The return switch 76 is a switch that is pressed when a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 75 is jammed in the selector 83. When the return switch 76 is pressed, the selector 83 is mechanically operated, The medals jammed in the selector 83 are returned from the medal discharge port 17.

  On the lower left side of the display windows 31L, 31M, 31R, as shown in FIG. 2, a button-like first credit insertion switch 77 is provided for inserting three virtual medals credited as game media at a time. Yes. Further, on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 77, a second credit insertion switch 78 and a third credit insertion switch 79 formed in a button shape smaller than the switch 77 are provided. The second credit insertion switch 78 is for inserting two credited virtual medals at a time, and the third credit insertion switch 79 is for inserting one virtual medal.

  Each of the credit insertion switches 77 to 79 constitutes an input means for inputting game media together with the medal insertion slot 75. Further, if the medal insertion slot 75 is accompanied by an operation of directly inserting a medal by the player, each credit insertion switch 77 to 79 is only accompanied by an operation of inserting a virtual medal based on the storage memory. It can also be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting the investment value.

  The first credit insertion switch 77 has a built-in lamp as a light emitting member (not shown) to urge that the maximum number of medals that can be inserted per game (three) has not been reached. The lamp is turned on when the switch operation of the first credit insertion switch 77 is valid and prompts the operation of the switch 77. However, when there is no credited virtual medal or three medals have already been inserted. It is turned off under the circumstances. Here, instead of the above-described lighting, the player may make it easier to understand the prompt for medal insertion by blinking.

  On the left side of the start lever 71, as shown in FIG. 2, a button-shaped changeover switch 80 is provided. The change-over switch 80 is configured to be a toggle type that is turned on when pressed once, turned off when pressed again, and turned on / off every time the pressing operation is performed. The changeover switch 80 is operated to change the handling format of inserted medals inserted into the medal slot 75 more than necessary, or acquired medals returned to the player as a result of a predetermined game.

  When the change-over switch 80 is in the ON state, the “credit mode” is set so that surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (for example, 50 medals) and winning medals are stored and stored as credit medals. " When the changeover switch 80 is in the OFF state, the “direct mode” is set so that surplus inserted medals and winning medals are paid out as actual medals. If there is a credit medal when the credit mode is switched to the direct mode, the corresponding credit medal is paid out as an actual medal. Thus, the player can execute the game in a format according to his / her preference by switching between the credit mode and the direct mode. The change-over switch 80 constitutes a change-over operation means for changing the input value and the game value handling type. Further, if paying attention to the function of paying out a credited virtual medal as an actual medal, it can be said that the changeover switch 80 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game value. In addition to being configured to switch between the “credit mode” and the “direct mode” by operating the changeover switch 80, the virtual medal stored and stored is paid out when the changeover switch 80 is operated by always setting the “credit mode”. It may be made to function as only a settlement switch.

  Below the gaming panel 30, a remaining number display unit 35 that displays the number of medals that are activated and stored in the credit mode, and the number of remaining games, for example, in a special gaming state such as a big bonus or a regular bonus. Is displayed, and a number-of-games display unit 37 for displaying the number of acquired medals is provided. Although these display parts 35-37 are comprised by the 7 segment display, it is naturally possible to substitute by a liquid crystal display etc. FIG.

  Here, a procedure for betting medals will be described. In both the direct mode and the credit mode, a bet is placed when a medal is inserted from the medal slot 75 at the start of the game.

  That is, when the first medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 75, the first effective line display section 32 is turned on, and the corresponding center line becomes the effective line, and the second medal is the medal insertion slot. When the second effective line display unit 33 is turned on, a total of three combination lines including an upper line and a lower line corresponding to the second effective line display unit 33 become effective lines, respectively. Is inserted into the medal insertion slot 75, the third effective line display section 34 is further turned on, and a total of five combination lines including a pair of diagonal lines corresponding thereto become effective lines.

  When four or more medals are inserted into the medal slot 75, the surplus medals exceeding three are switched to the discharge passage 82 by the selector 83 if the current mode is the direct mode. It is returned from the outlet 17 to the medal tray 18. On the other hand, in the credit mode, it is stored inside the slot machine, and the number of stored sheets is displayed on the remaining number display unit 35. An upper limit number is determined for the number of stored sheets (for example, 50), and when a medal exceeding the number is inserted, it is returned from the medal discharge port 17 to the medal tray 18.

  In addition, when a game is played in the credit mode and the number of stored items is displayed on the remaining number display unit 35, the virtual number is displayed even when any of the first to third credit insertion switches 77 to 79 is pressed. A medal is inserted and a bet is placed.

  When the third credit insertion switch 79 is pressed, the numerical value displayed on the remaining number display section 35 is decremented by one as a virtual medal is inserted, and the first effective line display section 32 is displayed. Illuminates and the center line becomes the active line. When the second credit insertion switch 78 is pressed, two numerical values displayed on the remaining number display section 35 are decremented as two virtual medals are inserted, and the first effective line display section 32, And the 2nd effective line display part 33 lights, and a total of 3 combination lines become an effective line. When the first credit insertion switch 77 is pressed, three numerical values displayed on the remaining number display unit 35 are decremented as three virtual medals are inserted, and all the effective line display units 32 to 32 are decremented. 34 lights up and a total of five combination lines become effective lines.

  In addition, when the virtual medal to be inserted when any of the first to third credit insertion switches 77 to 79 is pressed is not stored, for example, when the display of the remaining number display unit 35 is 2, the first For example, when the credit insertion switch 77 is pressed, all the values in the remaining number display section 35 are decremented to 0, and a bet is made for the amount of virtual medals that can be inserted.

  An upper lamp unit 13 is disposed above the front door 12. The upper lamp unit 13 includes an upper lamp 13a formed in a horizontally long shape along the upper side (upper base member 27) of the slot machine 10 therein. The upper lamp 13a includes a plurality of LEDs (light emitting devices) that can emit light, and the LEDs can be lit or blinked as the game progresses.

  In the present embodiment, the auxiliary display unit 15 is configured by a liquid crystal display with the intention of diversifying display contents and increasing the display effect, but uses other displays such as a dot matrix display. May be. The auxiliary display unit 15 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and it can be considered that the game by the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is caused by the main display unit. This is referred to as an auxiliary display unit 15. A display control device 111 for driving the upper lamp 13 a, the speaker 14, and the auxiliary display unit 15 is provided on the back surface of the auxiliary display unit 15. Note that the shape, position, number, and the like of the lamp 13 and the speaker 14 are not limited to those described above.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a lower plate 16 on which a model name, a character related to a game, and the like are displayed is mounted above the medal tray 18.

  As shown in FIG. 6, a power supply box 121 is provided on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the hopper device 91 inside the housing 11. The power supply box 121 includes a power switch 122, a reset switch 123, a setting key insertion hole 124, and the like. The power switch 122 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 131.

  The reset switch 123 is a switch for resetting various states of the slot machine 10. This slot machine 10 has a backup function for various data, and even if a power failure occurs, it retains the state at the time of the power failure and returns to the state at the time of the power failure at the time of recovery from power failure (power recovery). It can be done. Therefore, for example, when the power supply is shut down by a normal procedure, such as when the game hall is closed, the state before the power shut-off is stored, but if the power switch 122 is turned on while pressing the reset switch 123, the backup data is reset. It has become so. If the reset switch 123 is pressed while the power switch 122 is on, the error state is reset.

  The setting key insertion hole 124 is used by a hole manager or the like to adjust the appearance of medals. That is, the setting state (winning probability setting process) of the slot machine 10 can be changed from “setting 1” to “setting 6” by operating the hole manager or the like by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 124. It has become.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the main control device 131 is attached to the back plate 11 c of the housing 11 above the reel unit 41. The main control device 131 includes a CPU that controls the main control, a ROM that stores a game program, a RAM that temporarily stores necessary data according to the progress of the game, a port that communicates with various devices, time counting and synchronization. A main board including a clock circuit and the like used in the case of planning is provided, and the main board is accommodated in a board box as an encapsulating means made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other so as not to be opened by a sealing unit as a sealing means, whereby the substrate box is sealed. In addition, it is good also as a structure which connects a box base and a box cover so that opening is impossible using a key member.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the selector 83. The two-dot chain line in the figure indicates the medal passage route for easy understanding. The selector 83 is formed with a guide passage 85 for guiding medals inserted from the medal insertion port 75 to the storage passage 81. The guide passage 85 is formed in a curved line that draws an arc from the upper end to the lower right in the drawing so that medals can pass in one row. More specifically, the selector body constituting the selector 83 is provided with a ridge 85a protruding toward the front side of the figure, and a guide passage 85 is formed along the ridge 85a. Thereby, the medal that has reached the guide passage 85 flows in the downstream direction so as to roll on the ridge 85a.

  The medal passage switching member 84 includes a passage switching piece 84a that is provided upstream of the guide passage 85 and can be moved in and out of the guide passage 85, and a solenoid (not shown) for operating the passage switching piece 84a. doing. When the solenoid is not excited, the passage switching piece 84a protrudes into the guide passage 85, and the flow of medals to the storage passage 81 is obstructed. As a result, the medal falls downward so as to get over the protrusion 85 a and is guided to the discharge passage 82. Further, the passage switching piece 84a is sunk outside the guide passage 85 when the solenoid is excited. Thereby, the medal flows along the guide passage 85 and is guided to the storage passage 81.

  A first inserted medal detection sensor 86 for detecting the passage of medals and a second inserted medal detection sensor 87 are arranged close to each other on the downstream side of the passage switching piece 84a so as to be arranged upstream and downstream of the guide passage 85. (At least one time is set to a close state where the same medal is detected at the same time). When the solenoid of the medal path switching member 84 is not energized, the medal falls downward from the middle of the guide path 85, so that the inserted medal detection sensors 86 and 87 do not detect the passage of the medal. On the other hand, at the time of solenoid excitation of the medal path switching member 84, the passage of medals is sequentially detected by the inserted medal detection sensors 86 and 87.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the slot machine 10.

  The main control device 131 is equipped with a microcomputer centering on a CPU 151 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 161 provided in the power supply box 121, the CPU 151 is connected to a clock circuit 154 that outputs a rectangular wave having a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 155, and the like via an internal bus. The main control device 131 functions as a main base incorporated in the slot machine 10.

  On the input side of the main controller 131, there are a start detection sensor 71a for detecting the operation of the start lever 71, stop detection sensors 72a, 73a, 74a for individually detecting the operations of the stop switches 72, 73, 74, and a medal slot. A first inserted medal detection sensor 86 for detecting a medal inserted from 75, a second inserted medal detection sensor 87 (hereinafter, these sensors are collectively referred to as inserted medal detection sensors 86 and 87), and each credit. Credit insertion detection sensors 77a, 78a, and 79a that individually detect the operations of the insertion switches 77, 78, and 79, a switching detection sensor 80a that detects the operation of the switching switch 80, and the rotational position (origin position) of each reel 42 individually. Reel index sensor 55 to detect and medal paid out from the hopper device 91 are detected. Various sensors such as a payout detection sensor 91a, a reset detection sensor 123a that detects an operation of the reset switch 123, and a setting key detection sensor 124a that detects that a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 124 are connected. Signals from various sensors are output to the CPU 151 via the input / output port 155.

  The detection signals from the inserted medal detection sensors 86 and 87 are also input to the detection signal latch circuit 88. The detection signal latch circuit 88 receives a detection signal from the first inserted medal detection sensor 86 and a detection signal from the second inserted medal detection sensor 87, and outputs an output signal of the signal detection circuit unit. And a latch circuit portion for latching. The signal detection circuit unit is mainly composed of an OR circuit, and when a detection signal from the first insertion medal detection sensor 86 and a detection signal from the second insertion medal detection sensor 87 are input, Signals corresponding to these logical sums are output to the latch circuit unit, and further, latch signals are output from the latch circuit unit to the main controller 131. The latch signal output state of the detection signal latch circuit 88 is held until a signal release command is input from the main controller 131. Details will be described later.

  Further, a power failure monitoring circuit 161 b provided in the power supply device 161 is connected to the input side of the main control device 131 via the input / output port 155. The power supply device 161 includes a power supply unit 161 a that supplies driving power to the electronic devices of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 131, the power failure monitoring circuit 161 b described above, and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 161b is for monitoring the power-off state and generating a power failure signal not only at the time of power failure but also at the time of power-off by the power switch 122. For this reason, the power failure monitoring circuit 161b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of 12 VDC in this example output from the power supply unit 161a, and determines that the power supply is shut off when the drive voltage drops below, for example, 10 volts. Power outage signal is output. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 151 and the input / output port 155, and the CPU 151 recognizes this power failure signal and executes a power failure process described later.

  The power supply unit 161a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main controller 131 even when the output voltage is reduced to less than 10 volts. As the time during which the stabilization voltage is output, sufficient time is secured to execute the power failure process by the main controller 131.

  On the output side of the main control device 131, each active line display section 32, 33, 34, remaining number display section 35, game number display section 36, acquired number display section 37, and each reel 42L, 42M, 42R are rotated. Stepping motors 61 (61L, 61M, 61R), a medal path switching member 84 provided in the selector 83, a hopper device 91, a display control device 111, an external concentration terminal plate 171 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. Are connected via the input / output port 155.

  The display control device 111 is a control device for driving the upper lamp 13a, the throwing abnormality lamp 13b, the speaker 14, and the auxiliary display unit 15 constituting the lamp 13, and includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and the like for driving them. It has an integrated substrate. Then, after receiving a signal from the main control device 131, the display control device 111 independently controls each lamp 13a, 13b, the speaker 14, and the auxiliary display unit 15. Therefore, the display control device 111 is a sub-base that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 131 that is a main base that manages and manages games. In other words, the sub-base is provided for voice, lamp, and display related to indirect games, thereby reducing the burden on the main base. In addition, it is good also as a structure which the display control apparatus 111 controls the various display parts 32-37.

  The CPU 151 described above stores various control programs executed by the CPU 151 and a ROM 152 storing fixed value data, and temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 152 is executed. In addition to the RAM 153 for securing the area, although not shown, various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit, as well known, and a credit counter for counting the number of credits are known. Various counters such as are built-in. The ROM 152 and the RAM 153 constitute a main memory as storage means, and a program for executing the processes shown in various flowcharts shown in FIG.

  The RAM 153 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 161 provided in the power supply box 121 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the slot machine 10 is shut off. In addition to a memory and an area for temporarily storing various data and the like, a backup area is provided.

  In the backup area, when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the values of the stack pointer, each register, I / O, etc. when the power is shut down (including power shut down by operating the power switch 122; the same applies hereinafter) When the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 122. The same applies hereinafter), the slot machine 10 is in the state before power-off based on the backup area information. It is possible to return to the state. Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is shut off by the power failure process (see FIG. 10), and restoration of each value written in the backup area is executed in the main process (see FIG. 10) when the power is turned on. Note that a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 161b is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 151 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing as flag generation processing is immediately executed.

  Next, the displacement unit 300 disposed on the front door 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG.11 and FIG.12, the whole structure of the front door 12 in which the displacement unit 300 is arrange | positioned is demonstrated. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective front view of the front door 12, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective rear view of the front door 12.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the upper portion of the front door 12 is located on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the top plate 11a of the casing 11 and extends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). An upper base member 27 provided; a pair of left and right left base members 28 extending rightward from both ends of the upper base member 27 in the extending direction; and a right base member 29; The upper base member 27, the left base member 28, and the right base member 29 are formed in a portal shape in front view.

  Further, the front door 12 is provided with a game panel 30 on the front side of an inner region formed in a gate shape by the above-described upper base member 27, left base member 28, and right base member 29. An upper lamp unit 13, a left lamp unit 38, and a right lamp unit 39 are arranged at positions surrounding the game panel 30.

  The upper lamp unit 13 is disposed on the front side of the upper base member 27, the left lamp unit 38 is disposed on the front side of the left base member 28, and the right lamp unit 39 is disposed on the front side of the right base member 29. Is done.

  The gaming panel 30 includes an upper base member 27, a left base member 28, a right base member 29 formed in a gate shape, an upper lamp unit 13 disposed on the front side thereof, and a left lamp. It is interposed between the unit 38 and the right lamp unit 39. Thereby, the game panel 30 is attached to the front door 12.

  The upper lamp unit 13 is provided with an upper lamp 13a, the left lamp unit 38 is provided with a left lamp 38a, and the right lamp unit 39 is provided with a right lamp 39a on the inner side thereof, from these lamps 13a, 38a, 39a. The emitted light can be emitted around the slot machine 10. The lamps 13a, 38a, 39a can individually emit different colors.

  Further, the right lamp unit 39 is provided with a displacement unit 300 (described later) on the front side, and light emitted from the right lamp 39a passes through the inside of the displacement unit 300 so that the front side (game) From the person side). That is, the displacement unit 300 can emit light by the right lamp 39a.

  On the back side (arrow B direction side) of the upper base member 27, the left base member 28, and the right base member 29 formed in a gate shape, is higher than the reel unit 41 (see FIG. 3) described above (see FIG. 3). A liquid crystal frame member 600 disposed in the direction of arrow U) and an auxiliary display unit 15 disposed on the back side of the liquid crystal frame member 600.

  The liquid crystal frame member 600 is a member for facilitating visual recognition of an image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 15 from the player side, and is formed in a frame shape surrounding the periphery of the image display surface of the auxiliary display unit 15. The liquid crystal frame member 600 is fastened and fixed to the upper base member 27, the left base member 28, and the right base member 29, and the front door is in contact with the back side of the game panel 30. 12 is disposed. That is, the formation of a gap between the game panel 30 and the liquid crystal frame member 600 is suppressed. As a result, the image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 15 is reflected by portions where a gap is formed between the game panel 30 and the liquid crystal frame member 600 (the back of the game panel 30 and the front of the liquid crystal frame member 600). The reflected light (video) can be suppressed from being visually recognized by the player. As a result, an image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 15 can be easily viewed by the player.

  The liquid crystal frame member 600 is entirely formed of black. Thereby, compared with the case where the liquid crystal frame member 600 is formed in white, the liquid crystal frame member 600 can easily absorb the light irradiated to the liquid crystal frame member 600 from the outside of the slot machine 10. As a result, it is possible to suppress the light irradiated on the liquid crystal frame member 600 from the outside of the slot machine 10 from being reflected on the liquid crystal frame member 600 and the reflected light entering the auxiliary display unit 15. Therefore, it can suppress that the image displayed on the auxiliary | assistant display part 15 becomes difficult to visually recognize from a player.

  Further, the liquid crystal frame member 600 is formed in a front view frame shape surrounding the periphery of the image display surface of the auxiliary display unit 15 as described above, and is disposed above the reel unit 41 (see FIG. 3). The two regions of the image display surface of the auxiliary display unit 15 visually recognized through the game panel 30 and the reels 42L, 42M, and 42R of the reel unit 41 can be divided vertically.

  Next, the overall configuration of the displacement unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. 13 (a) is a front view of the displacement unit 300, FIG. 13 (b) is a side view of the displacement unit 300 in the XIIIb direction of FIG. 13 (a), and FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the displacement unit 300 in the XIIIc-XIIIc line | wire of (a). FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective front view of the displacement unit 300. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective rear view of the displacement unit 300.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, the displacement unit 300 includes a base unit 390 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the right lamp unit 39 (see FIG. 11) and the base unit 390. An intermediate member 380 disposed on the front side of the intermediate member 380 with the coil spring SP1 interposed therebetween, an operation unit 320 disposed on the front side of the intermediate member 380, and a part of the operation unit 320 (rotary unit 340). And a guide unit 350 that guides the displacement of the operation unit 320, and an annular member 310 that contains the operation unit 320, the guide unit 350, the intermediate member 380, the coil spring SP1, and the base unit 390. And mainly.

  The annular member 310 includes an annular portion 311 formed in a hollow annular shape (cylindrical shape) penetrating in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and an annular portion from the inner peripheral surface of the front side end portion of the annular portion 311 And a regulation wall 312 erected toward the inside of 311.

  The annular portion 311 is formed in a size that can accommodate a guide unit 350 and a base unit 390 described later. The annular portion 311 is formed with a plurality of fastening holes for fastening the guide unit 350 and the base unit 390 with screws inserted from the back side. Thereby, the guide unit 350 and the base unit 390 can be fastened and fixed to the annular member 310.

  The annular portion 311 is formed such that an inner edge (inner peripheral surface) penetrating in the front-rear direction (in the direction of the arrow FB) is inclined upward from the back side to the front side (FIG. 13C). reference). As a result, the operation unit 320, the guide unit 350, the intermediate member 380, the coil spring SP1, and the base unit 390 disposed on the inner side of the annular portion 311 are similarly inclined upwardly toward the front side. However, in the following description, in order to facilitate understanding, the overlapping direction of the operation unit 320, the guide unit 350, the intermediate member 380, the coil spring SP1, and the base unit 390 is described as the front-rear direction.

  The restriction wall 312 is formed in a disc shape, includes an opening 312 a, and an outer peripheral portion is connected to an inner peripheral surface of the annular portion 311. The opening 312a is formed in a perfect circular shape, and the opening width (inner diameter) is set smaller than the outer diameter of the guide unit 350 described later. Accordingly, when the guide unit 350 is disposed on the annular member 310, the guide unit 350 is inserted into the annular member 310 from the back side of the annular member 310, and the front side of the guide unit 350 is placed on the regulation wall 312. It can be made to contact with the back side of.

  The operation unit 320 includes a gripping unit 330 disposed on the front side, and a rotating unit 340 coupled to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the gripping unit 330.

  The gripping unit 330 is formed long in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) in a side view. Further, the gripping unit 330 is a part gripped by the player, and the front side (arrow F direction side) end is front side of the ring member 310 (through the opening 312a of the ring member 310 described above). It is projected to the player side), and the player can grasp (operate) the front end.

  Note that the player's operation mode with respect to the gripping unit 330 is not limited to the mode of gripping the gripping unit 330. For example, the mode of pushing the gripping unit 330 in the direction of arrow B without gripping the gripping unit 330 or the direction of arrow F It may be a mode of drawing out.

  The rotation unit 340 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape having an axis parallel to the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), and on the end surface on the front side (arrow F direction side) on the back side (arrow B). (Direction side) end is connected. Thereby, the rotation unit 340 can be displaced in conjunction with the gripping unit 330 being gripped (operated) and displaced by the player.

  The rotation unit 340 is housed inside a guide unit 350 described later, and displacement of the rotation unit 340 is regulated (guided) by a guide groove 351 formed inside the guide unit 350. Accordingly, the gripping unit 330 interlocked with the rotation unit 340 is restricted (guided) by the guide groove 351 formed in the guide unit 350. A detailed description of the guide groove 351 will be described later.

  The guide unit 350 is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the rotation unit 340, and controls the front-side guide unit 360 that restricts the displacement of the rotation unit 340 toward the front side, and the back side of the rotation unit 340 ( A rear side guide unit 370 that is disposed on the arrow B direction side and restricts displacement of the rotary unit 340 toward the rear side.

  The front-side guide unit 360 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape having a (parallel) axis along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the rotary unit 340. Further, the front-side guide unit 360 has an outer dimension in the front-rear direction larger than that of the rotary unit 340, and the rotary unit 340 can be accommodated inside the front-side guide unit 360.

  The back-side guide unit 370 includes a first portion 371 formed in a substantially annular shape having an axis (parallel) along the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), and the inner diameter of the first portion 371 is the rotation unit 340. It is formed smaller than the outer diameter. Therefore, after the rotation unit 340 is accommodated inside the front side guide unit 360, the rotation unit 340 is accommodated inside the guide unit 350 by fastening the front side guide unit 360 and the back side guide unit 370. A detailed description of the configuration of the back side guide unit 370 and the displacement of the rotating unit 340 will be given later.

  The intermediate member 380 is a member that transmits the urging force of the coil spring SP1 to the rotary unit 340, and is disposed at a position adjacent to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the rotary unit 340. Further, the intermediate member 380 is formed in a disc shape, and the outer diameter thereof is set smaller than the inner diameter of the back side guide unit 370 of the guide unit 350. Thereby, the intermediate member 380 can be displaced inside the guide unit 350.

  The intermediate member 380 has a first opening 381 that opens in a circular shape at a disk-shaped center position, and opens in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) at a position that is radially outward from the center of the first opening 381. A second opening 382, a third opening 383 opening in the front-rear direction at a position different from the second opening 382 in the circumferential direction, and a protruding portion protruding radially outward from a part of the outer peripheral portion 384.

  The first opening 381 is an opening for aligning (positioning) the intermediate member 380 with respect to the rotation unit 340. The intermediate member 380 is aligned with the rotation unit 340 by inserting an insertion portion 342a protruding from the back side of the rotation unit 340, which will be described later, into the first opening 381.

  Further, the intermediate member 380 includes a cylindrical standing portion 385 that is erected from the back side (arrow B direction side) along the inner edge of the first opening 381. The standing portion 385 is a portion on which the front side (arrow F direction side) of the coil spring SP1 is fitted, and the outer diameter is set smaller than the inner diameter of the coil spring SP1. Therefore, since the coil spring SP1 is externally fitted to the standing portion 385, the position of the coil spring SP1 with respect to the intermediate member 380 can be prevented from being shifted due to elastic deformation of the coil spring SP1.

  The second opening 382 is a long hole-shaped opening that is curved along an arc centered on the axis of the intermediate member 380 (that is, an annular shape that is concentric with the axis of the intermediate member 380 in the circumferential direction). Opening). The second opening 382 is an opening through which an engagement piece 342b of the rotating unit 340 described later is inserted, and is formed in a size (region) that does not interfere with the displacement locus of the engagement piece 342b.

  The third opening 383 is an opening through which a wiring (not shown) extending from the right lamp unit 39 to the inside of the rotation unit 340 (operation unit 320) through the base unit 390 is inserted. Further, the intermediate member 380 includes a wall portion 386 erected from the back side (arrow B direction side) along the inner edge of the third opening 383. The wall 386 is formed as a continuous wall along the inner edge of the third opening 383.

  Thereby, the wiring extended from the base unit 390 can be connected to the inside of the rotation unit 340 (operation unit 320) through the third opening 383 (inserted). Further, when the intermediate member 380 is displaced, the wall portion 386 prevents the wiring connected to the inside of the rotary unit 340 from being sandwiched between the intermediate member 380 and the base unit 390, and the wiring is disconnected. Can be suppressed.

  The projecting portion 384 is a projection that is inserted inside a recessed portion 371a of the guide unit 350, which will be described later, and engages with the guide unit 350. The outer shape of the projecting portion 384 is the inner shape of the recessed portion 371a. And corresponding shapes. Therefore, in the state in which the projecting portion 384 is inserted inside the recessed portion 371a, even if an external force that rotates and displaces the intermediate member 380 around the axis with respect to the guide unit 350 is input to the intermediate member 380, the projecting portion 384 is provided. The rotation of the intermediate member 380 relative to the guide unit 350 is suppressed (restricted) by the portion 384 being in contact with the inner surface of the recessed portion 371a.

  The base unit 390 covers the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the annular member 310, and the operation unit 320, the guide unit 350, and the intermediate member 380 housed in the annular member 310 come out to the back side. The inner edge shape and the outer edge in the rear view of the annular member 310 are formed substantially the same, and are fastened and fixed inside the rear side of the annular member 310.

  In addition, the base unit 390 includes a plurality of fastening holes 392a3 on the back side in which the screw tips inserted from the back side into the insertion holes of the right base member 29 described above are screwed. Therefore, the displacement unit 300 in which a plurality of components are integrated is arranged in the front door 12 by screwing the screw inserted from the back side of the right base member 29 (see FIG. 11) into the fastening hole 392a3. Is done. Therefore, since the head of the screw that fastens the displacement unit 300 to the front door 12 can be positioned on the back side of the right base member 29, it is possible to suppress the displacement unit 300 from being illegally removed from the player side.

  Next, the gripping unit 330 and the rotation unit 340 of the operation unit 320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 (a) is a front view of the operation unit 320, FIG. 16 (b) is a side view of the operation unit 320 in the XVIb direction view of FIG. 16 (a), and FIG. 4 is a rear view of a unit 320. FIG. 17A is a perspective front view of the operation unit 320, and FIG. 17B is a perspective rear view of the operation unit 320. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit 320, and FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the gripping unit 330.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 to 19, the gripping unit 330 includes a right cover member 331 disposed on the right side in the front view, a left cover member 332 disposed on the left side in the front view, the right cover member 331, And a vibration device 333 disposed between the left cover member 332 and the like.

  The right cover member 331 is positioned on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the gripping unit 330 that is formed long in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), and has a circular portion 331a that is formed in a circular plate shape. A protruding portion 331b that protrudes from the outer edge of the portion 331a toward the outer side in the radial direction (arrow B direction side) and is located on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the gripping unit 330, and the inner surface of the circular portion 331a An annular right first wall 331c projecting (standing) from the (opposite surface to the left cover member 332) toward the left cover member 332 side (arrow L direction side), and front and rear of the projecting portion 331b Right side second wall portion 331d that protrudes (stands up) from the outer edge extending in the direction (arrow F-B direction) toward the left cover member 332 side, and the inside (circular center) of the right side first wall portion 331c. Of the circular portion 331a A right third wall 331e that protrudes (stands up) in an annular shape that is substantially concentric with the right first wall 331c from the surface, and a protrusion that protrudes from the back side end of the protrusion 331b toward the back side. Part 331f.

  The left cover member 332 is formed in substantially the same shape (substantially plane-symmetric shape with the mating surface with the right cover member 331 as a symmetric surface) obtained by inverting the right cover member 331 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). Is done. Therefore, the left cover member 332 is, like the right cover member 331, positioned on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the gripping unit 330 formed long in the front-rear direction, and a circular portion 332a formed in a circular plate shape. A projecting portion 332b that projects from the outer edge of the circular portion 332a toward the outer side of the circular radial direction (arrow B direction side) and is located on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the gripping unit 330; The left first wall portion 332c projecting from the inner surface of 332a (the surface facing the right cover member 331) toward the right cover member 331 side (arrow R direction side), and the front-rear direction of the projecting portion 332b (arrow F) -B direction) is located on the inner side (circular center side) of the second left wall 332d protruding from the outer edge extending toward the right cover member 331 and the left first wall 332c. Circular part 332 A left third wall portion 332e that protrudes (stands up) in an annular shape that is substantially concentric with the right first wall portion 331c, and a rear side end portion of the protrusion portion 332b that protrudes toward the back side. A protrusion 332f.

  Therefore, in the following description, the right cover member 331 is described as a representative example, and the description of the left cover member 332 is omitted. Different parts of the right cover member 331 and the left cover member 332 will be described later.

  The circular portion 331a is the right side surface when the player grips the grip unit 330, the circular central portion is formed in a flat shape, and the annular portion on the outer side (outer edge side) than the central portion is the left cover. Inclined toward the member 332 side. Thereby, the thickness of the gripping unit 330 at the portion gripped by the player can be increased at the center, and the player can easily grip the gripping unit 330. That is, since the circular portion 331a is inclined at the outer annular portion, the thickness of the outer portion of the gripping unit 330 can be reduced. Thereby, when a player holds the grip unit 330, the player's hand can be prevented from being caught by the end of the circular portion 331a, and the player can easily rotate the grip unit 330.

  The protruding portion 331b is a portion that secures an amount by which the circular portion 331a of the gripping unit 330 is displaced to the back side when the operation unit 320 is displaced to the back side. It is set smaller than the inner diameter of the reduced diameter portion 361b. Thereby, the protruding portion 331b can be inserted into the guide unit 350 through the reduced diameter portion 361b. In addition, when the operation unit 320 is displaced to the back side by the length of the protruding portion 331b protruding from the reduced diameter portion 361b on the front side (arrow F direction side), the circular portion 331a becomes the guide unit 350. It can suppress contacting.

  The right first wall portion 331c and the right second wall portion 331d of the right cover member 331 are erected toward the left cover member 322 side, and the left first wall portion 332c of the left cover member 332 and the left The two wall portions 332d are erected toward the right cover member 321 side, and when the right cover member 331 and the left cover member 332 are combined, the standing front end surfaces of the wall portions abut against each other. Therefore, a gap (space) is formed between the circular portion 331a and the protruding portion 331b, and the circular portion 332a and the protruding portion 332b, and the vibration device 333 is disposed in the gap.

  The right first wall portion 331c includes an engaging portion 331c1 and a positioning projection 331c2. The engaging portion 331c1 is located on the front side (arrow F direction side, opposite to the protruding portion 331b) of the right first wall portion 331c, and the standing front end side (arrow L direction side) of the right first wall portion 331c. Projecting from the inner peripheral surface to the radially inner side (arrow B direction side, projecting portion 331b side). The positioning protrusion 331c2 is connected to the inner peripheral surface of the right first wall portion 331c and protrudes to the left cover member 332 side from the standing tip of the right first wall portion 331c.

  On the other hand, the left first wall portion 332c includes an engaged portion 332c1 and a positioning protrusion 332c2. The engaged portion 332c1 is located on the front side of the left first wall portion 332c (arrow F direction side, opposite to the protruding portion 332b), and the standing first end side (arrow R direction side) of the left first wall portion 332c. ) Projecting radially inward (arrow B direction side, projecting portion 332b side). The engaged portion 332c1 protrudes from the inner peripheral surface of the left first wall portion 332c to the inside in the radial direction, and from the protruding tip of the first portion to the right cover member 331 side. From the second part and the third part that is folded back from the protruding tip of the second part to the front side (arrow F direction side) and extends substantially parallel to the first part, the cross section is substantially U-shaped. It is formed. The positioning protrusion 332c2 is connected to the inner peripheral surface of the left first wall 332c and protrudes toward the right cover member 331 from the standing tip of the left first wall 332c.

  The engaging portion 331c1 and the engaged portion 332c1 are disposed at corresponding positions (same phase), and the right cover member 331 and the left side are in a state where the engaging portion 331c1 and the engaged portion 332c1 are engaged. The cover member 332 can be combined. Specifically, when the right cover member 331 and the left cover member 332 are combined and fastened, the engaging portion 331c1 is inserted (arranged) between the first portion and the second portion of the engaged portion 332c1. Thereby, the front side (player side) of the mating surfaces of the right cover member 331 and the left cover member 332 can be engaged, and the mating surfaces can be prevented from being opened.

  Further, when the right cover member 331 and the left cover member 332 are combined, the positioning protrusion 331c2 of the right cover member 331 is inscribed in the inner peripheral surface of the left first wall portion 332c of the left cover member 332, and the left cover member 332 is in contact. The positioning protrusion 332c2 is inscribed in the inner peripheral surface of the right first wall portion 331c of the right cover member 331. Accordingly, the right cover member 331 and the left cover member 332 can be positioned in the radial direction.

  The positioning protrusion 331c2 and the positioning protrusion 332c2 are formed at different positions (different phases) in the circumferential direction of the first wall portions 331c and 332c, and when the right cover member 331 and the left cover member 332 are combined, the positioning protrusion 331c2 And the positioning protrusion 332c2 are prevented from interfering with each other.

  The right third wall portion 331 e is a wall portion (projection) that houses the vibration device 333 on the inside, and is formed in an annular shape along the outer shape of the vibration device 333. Thereby, when electric power is applied to the vibration device 333 and the vibration device 333 is vibrated, the vibration is transmitted to the outside of the gripping unit 330 (the gripping unit 330 via the right third wall portion 331e and the circular portion 331a). To the player's hand). Thereby, the vibration device 333 can be vibrated to allow the player to recognize that it is time to operate the displacement unit 300, or to recognize that the gaming state is advantageous to the player.

  The protruding portion 331f is a portion that is fastened to the rotating unit 340, and fastening holes (not shown) into which screws inserted from the rotating unit 340 side (rear side) are screwed are formed at a plurality of positions on the protruding tip portion. Is done. Further, the protruding portion 331f is formed in an outer shape corresponding to a recessed shape of a recessed portion 341a1 described later. Therefore, the gripping unit 330 is fastened to the rotating unit 340 in a state where the protruding portion 331f is accommodated in the recessed portion 341a1 of the rotating unit 340.

  In addition, a through hole 331f1 penetrating in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) is formed in the protruding portion 331f of the right cover member 331. On the other hand, the protruding portion 332f of the left cover member 332 is formed with a fastening hole 332f1 into which a screw is screwed. Also, the through hole 331f1 and the fastening hole 332f1 are formed coaxially in the left-right direction, and the right cover member 331 and the left cover member 332 are fastened by screwing a screw inserted through the through hole 331f1 into the fastening hole 332f1. Is done.

  That is, the back side of the right cover member 331 is fastened to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the left cover member 332 by screwing the through hole 331f1 and the fastening hole 332f1. As described above, the front side of the right cover member 331, the left cover member 332, and the (gripping unit 330) is engaged by the engaging portion 331c1 and the engaged portion 332c1. Therefore, the right cover member 331 and the left cover member 332 are removed by screwing the screw inserted through the through hole 331f1 into the fastening hole 332f1 in a state where the engaging portion 331c1 and the engaged portion 332c1 are engaged. Impossible.

  In this case, when the gripping unit 330 is connected to the rotation unit 340, screws (projections 331 f and 332 f) that fasten the right cover member 331 and the left cover member 332 are accommodated in the recessed portion 341 a 1 of the rotation unit 340. Therefore, in the state where the displacement unit 300 is assembled, the gripping unit 330 can be hardly disassembled. As a result, it is possible to suppress the gripping unit 330 from being illegally disassembled by the player.

  The rotation unit 340 surrounds the front side member 341 connected to the gripping unit 330, the columnar shaft member 343 projecting radially outward from the back side member 342, and the periphery of the shaft member 343. And an annular guided member 344 disposed in a state of being rotatably fitted.

  The front side member 341 is located on the gripping unit 330 side (front side) and is formed in a circular shape in front view, and toward the back side (arrow B direction side) along the outer edge of the connection portion 341a. A cylindrical standing wall 341b that is erected.

  The connecting portion 341a includes a recessed portion 341a1 that is recessed toward the inner side (rear side) of the standing wall 341b, and an opening 341a2 that is formed through the inner portion that is recessed by the recessed portion 341a1. Prepare.

  The recessed portion 341a1 is a portion to which the above-described gripping unit 330 is connected, and a plurality of insertion holes (not shown) are formed in the recessed bottom surface. The insertion hole of the recessed portion 341a1 opens at a position facing each of fastening holes (not shown) formed at a plurality of locations (four locations in the present embodiment) of the protruding portions 331f and 332f of the gripping unit 330. Therefore, the grip unit 330 and the rotation unit 340 (front side member 341) are fastened by fastening the screw inserted through the insertion hole of the recessed portion 341a1 to the fastening hole formed in the protrusions 331f and 332f. .

  The opening 341a2 is an opening through which a wiring (not shown) connected to the vibration device 333 of the gripping unit 330 described above is inserted from the rotating unit 340 side to the gripping unit 330 side. It communicates with the space between the facing portions 332b. Therefore, the wiring inserted through the opening 341a2 is inserted into the grip unit 330 from the space between the protruding portion 331b and the protruding portion 332b and is coupled to the vibration device 333.

  The standing wall 341b is a portion that regulates the posture of the rotation unit 340 (operation unit 320) with respect to a guide unit 350 described later, and has a cylindrical shape having a predetermined length in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). Formed. The outer diameter of the standing wall 341b is an imaginary circle circumscribing each of the plurality of protrusions 362a1 in the second annular member 362 of the guide unit 350 (described later) (virtual line KS1 (see FIG. 21A)). The diameter is set slightly smaller than the diameter. Thereby, when the rotation unit 340 is accommodated inside the guide unit 350, the outer peripheral surface of the standing wall 341b is at the tips (outer peripheral surfaces) of the plurality of protrusions 362a1 in the second annular member 362 of the guide unit 350. The position of the operation unit 320 with respect to the guide unit 350 is restricted by the contact.

  The standing wall 341b includes a restriction piece 341b1 that protrudes radially outward from the outer peripheral surface. The restricting piece 341b1 is a portion that defines a rotation range (rotation amount) of the rotation unit 340 with respect to the guide unit 350, and is disposed inside an accommodation recess 362a5 of a second annular member 362 of the guide unit 350 described later. When the rotation unit 340 is rotationally displaced relative to the guide unit 350, the regulation piece 341b1 is brought into contact with one inner surface or the other inner surface of the housing recess 362a5, so that the guide unit of the rotation unit 340 The rotation in one direction relative to 350 or the rotation in the other direction is restricted. Thereby, the rotation range (rotation amount) of the rotation unit 340 is defined.

  The back side member 342 is formed in a disk shape having a diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the standing wall 341b, and is disposed on the standing wall 341b at a position where the central axis is coaxial with the axis of the standing wall 341b. Is done. Further, the back-side member 342 is positioned away from the insertion portion 342a in the radial direction outside the columnar insertion portion 342a protruding from the center (shaft portion) of the back surface (surface opposite to the front-side member 341). An engagement piece 342b that protrudes from the back surface, an insertion opening 342c that opens to a position different from the engagement piece 342b in the circumferential direction, and an annular standing portion 342d that stands from the front are provided.

  As described above, the insertion portion 342a is a portion that is inserted into the first opening 381 of the intermediate member 380, and the outer diameter thereof is set to be equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the first opening 381. Therefore, by inserting the insertion portion 342 a into the first opening 381, the position of the intermediate member 380 with respect to the rotation unit 340 is suppressed from shifting in the radial direction (axially perpendicular direction). That is, the rotation unit 340 and the intermediate member 380 are coupled so as to be relatively rotatable in a state where the radial relative positions are positioned.

  The engagement piece 342b is a portion that engages with a first displacement member 396 of the base unit 390, which will be described later, and transmits the displacement of the rotation unit 340 to the displacement unit 395. The length of the engagement piece 342b is such that the inserted tip is the back surface of the intermediate member 380 when the engagement piece 342b is inserted through the second opening 382 of the intermediate member 380 (see FIG. 15) (assembled state of the displacement unit 300). To the base unit 390 side.

  The engagement piece 342b is formed in a substantially T-shaped cross section from the first piece 342b1 and the second piece 342b2. The first piece 342b1 is formed in a cross-sectional shape that extends in the circumferential direction around the center (axis) side of the front-side member 341, and is erected from the back surface of the front-side member 341 while maintaining the cross-sectional shape. The second piece 342b2 is formed in a rectangular cross section and protrudes from the inner peripheral surface of the first piece 342b1 toward the insertion portion 342a. That is, the second piece 342b2 extends along the longitudinal direction of the first piece 342b1. Thereby, the rigidity of the engagement piece 342b is increased, and the engagement piece 342b can be prevented from being broken (broken) when the engagement piece 342b is engaged with the first displacement member 396.

  As described above, the insertion opening 342c is an opening through which a wiring (not shown) that is inserted through the third opening 383 of the intermediate member 380 to the rotation unit 340 side is inserted into the rotation unit 340. As a result, the wiring inserted into the rotary unit 340 from the right lamp unit 39 (see FIG. 11) via the base unit 390 and the intermediate member 380 is inserted through the opening 341a2 of the front side member 341 of the rotary unit 340. Thus, the vibration unit 333 of the gripping unit 330 can be connected.

  The standing portion 342d is a cylindrical portion that is erected from the position entering the radially inner side of the outer edge of the back side member 342 toward the front side member 341 (front side), and has an outer diameter of the back side. The dimension is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the side member 342. Further, the outer diameter of the standing portion 342d is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the standing wall 341b of the front side member 341, and when the front side member 341 and the back side member 342 are combined, the standing portion 342d. Is disposed (internally fitted) inside the standing wall 341b of the front side member 341. Therefore, when combining the front side member 341 and the back side member 342, it is possible to easily position the back side member 342 with respect to the front side member 341 by inserting the standing portion 342d into the standing wall 341b. Further, since the standing portion 342d is inserted (internally fitted) into the standing wall 341b, it is possible to secure the rigidity of the rotating unit 340 and to secure the rigidity of the rotating unit 340, and between the front side member 341 and the back side member 342. It can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire and a piano wire, are inserted into the interior space from the mating surface.

  The standing portion 342d includes a shaft support hole 342d1 penetrating in the radial direction (plate thickness direction (a direction orthogonal to the axis of the back side member 342)). The shaft support hole 342d1 is a hole through which a shaft member 343 described later is inserted. Further, the shaft support hole 342d1 is formed at a position where the pair faces each other across the axis of the back side member 342 (position where the phases are different by 180 degrees).

  The shaft member 343 includes a part formed in a columnar shape, a diameter-enlarged portion 343a formed by expanding toward the radially outer side on one axial end side of the columnar part, and a shaft of the columnar part. A groove portion 343b provided in a groove shape on the other end side in the direction. The shaft member 343 is inserted into a guided member 344 and a shaft support hole 342d1, which will be described later, with the other end in the axial direction where the groove 343b is formed facing the center of the back side member 342.

  The enlarged diameter portion 343a is a restriction portion that restricts the guided member 344 from slipping out toward one end in the axial direction, and the outer diameter thereof is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the guided member 344.

  The groove portion 343b is formed as a concave groove that is continuous in the entire circumference in the circumferential direction, and an E-ring C having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 342d1 of the back side member 342 is fitted into the concave groove (groove portion 343b). . As a result, the shaft member 343 cannot be removed from the shaft support hole 342d1.

  The guided member 344 is a cylindrical (roller-shaped) member that is guided by a guide groove 351 (see FIG. 22D) of a guide unit 350 described later. As described above, the shaft member 343 is disposed on the inner peripheral side. Is inserted. The guided member 344 has an inner diameter that is set to be larger than the outer diameter of a portion (a portion formed in a columnar shape) excluding the enlarged diameter portion 343 a of the shaft member 343.

  As a result, the guided member 344 is rotatably held (axially supported) by the shaft member 343. Therefore, when the guided member 344 is guided by the guide groove 351 of the guide unit 350, the guided member 344 is rotated (rolled) with respect to the inner surface of the guide groove 351, so that the rear side member 342 (rotary unit) 340) can be displaced.

  Next, the guide unit 350 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. 20 (a) is a front view of the guide unit 350, FIG. 20 (b) is a perspective front view of the guide unit 350, and FIG. 20 (c) is a perspective rear view of the guide unit 350. FIG. 20D is a cross-sectional view of the guide unit 350 taken along the line XXd-XXd in FIG. FIG. 21A is an exploded perspective front view of the guide unit 350, and FIG. 21B is an exploded cross-sectional view of the guide unit 350. FIG. 21 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

  As described above, the guide unit 350 is disposed on the front side guide unit 360 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) and on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the front side guide unit 360. A back side guide unit 370.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the front side guide unit 360 is formed by combining two cylindrical members formed in an annular shape in front view in the axial direction and arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side). A first annular member 361, and a second annular member 362 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first annular member 361.

  The first annular member 361 is reduced in diameter from a cylindrical tubular portion 361a and an end portion on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the tubular portion 361a (projects radially inward into a flange shape). A reduced-diameter portion 361b, and an attachment portion 361c formed by partially bulging (extending) radially outward from an end on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the tubular portion 361a. .

  The cylindrical portion 361a has an outer diameter that is substantially the same as or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the opening 312a of the annular member 310 (see FIG. 14) described above. Accordingly, when the guide unit 350 is disposed on the annular member 310, the cylindrical portion 361a (guide unit 350) is fitted into the opening 312a of the annular member 310, and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 312a and the cylindrical shape are formed. It can suppress that a clearance gap is formed between the outer peripheral surfaces of the part 361a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from inserting an unauthorized member (for example, a wire or a piano wire) into the displacement unit 300 from the front side of the slot machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

  The reduced diameter portion 361b has an inner diameter that is smaller than the diameter of the circular portions 331a and 332a (see FIG. 17) of the grip unit 330 described above. Therefore, for example, when the rotation unit 340 is damaged and the rotation unit 340 is displaced larger than a predetermined displacement amount, the circular portions 331a and 332a of the gripping unit 330 are brought into contact with the inner edge of the 361b at the reduced diameter portion. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the entire gripping unit 330 (circular portions 331a and 332a) from being pushed into the guide unit 350.

  A screw hole (not shown) into which a screw for fastening the first annular member 361 and the second annular member 362 is screwed is formed in the attachment portion 361c on the back side.

  The second annular member 362 includes a first cylindrical portion 362a formed in a cylindrical shape, a cylindrical second cylindrical portion 362b that is located on the outer peripheral side of the first cylindrical portion 362a and surrounds the first cylindrical portion 362a, A connecting portion that connects the outer peripheral surface of the first cylindrical portion 362a and the inner peripheral surface of the second cylindrical portion 362b.

  The first cylindrical portion 362a is positioned at the plurality of protruding portions 362a1 protruding from the inner peripheral surface and the back side (arrow B direction side) end portion of the first cylindrical portion 362a, and on the inner peripheral surface of the first cylindrical portion 362a. And a recessed portion 362a2 and a recessed portion 362a5 that are recessed.

  As described above, the protruding portion 362a1 is a portion that contacts the outer peripheral surface of the standing wall 341b of the rotating unit 340 and regulates the posture (position) of the rotating unit 340 (operation unit 320) with respect to the guide unit 350. A plurality (11 in this embodiment) are dispersedly arranged with a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of the first cylindrical portion 362a. The plurality of protrusions 362a1 are formed in a form in which a virtual circle circumscribes the distal end surfaces (outer peripheral surfaces) of the plurality of protrusions 362a1 when viewed from the front (in the axial direction of the second annular member 362). The diameter of the virtual circle (virtual line KS1) is set to a diameter that is substantially equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the standing wall 341b of the rotating unit 340.

  Thereby, when the rotation unit 340 (operation unit 320) is displaced, the area which the standing wall 341b of the rotation unit 340 and the 1st cylindrical part 362a of the guide unit 350 contact can be decreased. Therefore, the resistance when displacing the rotation unit 340 (operation unit 320) can be reduced, and the rotation unit 340 can be easily displaced.

  The recessed portion 362a2 is a portion where the guided member 344 of the rotating unit 340 is disposed inside, and the shaft of the first cylindrical portion 362a corresponds to the guided member 344 disposed as a pair in the rotating unit 340. A pair is formed at positions opposite to each other (positions where the phases are different by 180 degrees). In the assembled state of the displacement unit 300, the guided member 344 of the rotation unit 340 is accommodated in the recessed portion 362 a 2, and the guided member 344 is moved (rolled) along the inner wall of the recessed portion 362 a 2. The operation direction (displacement direction) of the unit 320 is guided.

  As described above, the accommodation recess 362a5 is a portion in which the restriction piece 341b1 of the rotation unit 340 is accommodated inside, and when the rotation unit 340 is displaced, the accommodation recess 362a5 is restricted to the inner wall facing the circumferential direction of the accommodation recess 362a5. The pieces 341b1 are brought into contact with each other to restrict the rotation of the rotary unit 340 within a predetermined range. In the present embodiment, the accommodation recess 362a5 is recessed in a range of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the axis of the first cylindrical portion 362a, and the rotatable range (angle) of the rotary unit 340 (operation unit 320) is set. It is set to about 45 degrees.

  The second cylindrical portion 362b has an end on the front side (arrow F direction side) connected to the outer peripheral surface of the first cylindrical portion 362a, and a portion connecting the second cylindrical portion 362b and the first cylindrical portion 362a. A through hole (not shown) for inserting a screw is formed. The first annular member 361 and the second annular member 362 are fastened and fixed by screwing the screw inserted through the through hole into the attachment portion 361c of the first annular member 361 (front-side guide unit). 360 is assembled).

  The rear-side guide unit 370 includes a first part 371 formed in an annular shape, a second part 372 projecting from the first part 371 to the front side, and an outer edge of the first part 371 on the front side. And a third portion 373 provided.

  The outer diameter of the first portion 371 is set larger than the outer diameter of the first cylindrical portion 362a described above, and the inner diameter is set smaller than the outer diameter of the standing wall 341b described above. Further, the first portion 371 is formed with a recessed portion 371a that is recessed from a part of the inner edge toward the radially outer side.

  As described above, the recessed portion 371a is a portion in which the projecting portion 384 of the intermediate member 380 is accommodated. By accommodating the projecting portion 384 in the recessed portion 371a, the rotation of the intermediate member 380 with respect to the guide unit 350 is performed. Is regulated.

  The second part 372 is located along the inner edge of the first part 371 and protrudes toward the second annular member 362 side (front side). As shown in FIG. 20 (d), the second portion 372 is a portion disposed in the recessed portion 362a2 of the second annular member 362 described above, and the protruding front end surface is the inner wall of the recessed portion 362a2 ( A stepped surface connecting the inner peripheral surface of the recessed portion 362a2 and the inner peripheral surface of the first cylindrical portion 362a).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 20 (d), the assembled guide unit 350 includes a connecting surface of the recessed bottom surface of the recessed portion 362a2 and the inner peripheral surface of the first cylindrical portion 362a, and the rear side guide unit 370. A pair of guide grooves 351 in which a part of the recessed portion 362a2 is surrounded by the first portion 371 and the second portion 372 are formed at positions facing each other across the center of the first cylindrical portion 362a.

  The guide groove 351 is a groove for guiding the guided member 344 of the rotating unit 340 described above, and the groove width is set larger than the outer diameter of the guided member 344. A detailed description of the guide groove 351 will be described later.

  The inner diameter of the third portion 373 is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the first cylindrical portion 362a of the second annular member 362, and the rear surface of the second annular member 362 (front-side guide unit 360). When the rear side guide unit 370 is disposed on the side, the first cylindrical portion 362a is externally fitted. Thereby, the positioning at the time of arranging the back side guide unit 370 in the front side guide unit 360 can be simplified. Moreover, the rigidity of the guide unit 350 can be ensured by fitting the third portion 373 to the first cylindrical portion 362a. In particular, the rigidity of the second annular member 362 can be ensured and deformation of the guide groove 351 can be suppressed. Therefore, the guide of the guided member 344 by the guide groove 351 can be stabilized and the operability of the operation unit 320 can be improved.

  Next, a guide structure when the operation unit 320 is displaced with respect to the guide unit 350 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  22 (a), 23 (a) and 24 (a) are perspective front views of the operation unit 320 and the guide unit 350. FIG. 22 (b), FIG. 23 (b) and FIG. FIG. 22B is a front view of the operation unit 320 and the guide unit 350. FIGS. 22C, 23C, and 24C are FIGS. 22B, 23B, and 23C. FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit 320 and the guide unit 350 along the line XXIIc-XXIIc, the line XXIIIc-XXIIIc, and the line XXIVc-XXIV in FIG. (D) is an operation unit 320 in the XXIId-XXIId line, XXIIId-XXIIId line, and XXIVd-XXIVd line in FIG. 22 (a), FIG. 23 (a), and FIG. It is a cross-sectional view of the unit 350.

  22C, FIG. 23C, and FIG. 24C, only the outline of the operation unit 320 disposed in the guide unit 350 is shown by a two-dot chain line. 22 to 24 illustrate the transition state of the operation unit 320 with respect to the guide unit 350 in order. FIG. 22 illustrates a state in which the player has not been operated and the operation unit 320 is arranged at the initial position. FIG. 24 illustrates a position where the operation unit 320 is operated by the player and the operation unit 320 is the end of the movable range. FIG. 23 shows a state where the operation unit 320 is disposed at a position between the initial position and the end position (hereinafter referred to as “intermediate position”). Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 22, in the state where the operation unit 320 is disposed at the initial position with respect to the guide unit 350, the center lines of the right cover member 331 of the gripping unit 330 and the circular portions 331a and 332a of the left cover member 332 are horizontal. Parallel to the direction (the direction of the arrow LR) (that is, the flat surface at the center of the circular portions 331a and 332a is orthogonal to the direction of the arrow LR), and the front side of the rotary unit 340 of the operation unit 320 is the first annular ring. It arrange | positions in the position contact | abutted to the back surface of the diameter reducing part 361b of the member 361 (refer FIG.23 (c)).

  As described above, in the operation unit 320, the guided member 344 of the rotating unit 340 is disposed in the guide groove 351 of the guide unit 350, and the guided member 344 is displaced (guided) along the guide groove 351. Thus, the displacement of the operation unit 320 with respect to the guide unit 350 is defined.

  Here, the guide groove 351 will be described. As shown in FIG. 22D, the guide groove 351 is formed by the second annular member 362 and the rear side guide unit 370 of the front side guide unit 360, and the second annular member 362 and the back side It extends in the circumferential direction of the side guide unit 370. A part of the guide groove 351 is formed to be inclined.

  The guide groove 351 is formed by a first guide surface 351a and a second guide surface 351b formed by the second annular member 362, and a back side guide unit 370 as an inner wall for guiding the movement (rolling) of the guided member 344. A third guide surface 351c and a fourth guide surface 351d are formed. The guide groove 351 is an inner wall that restricts the movement (rolling) of the guided member 344, and a first end 351 e formed by the back side guide unit 370 and a second annular member 362. 2 end 351f.

  Here, in a gaming machine including a base member and a displacement member that is displaced along a groove formed in the base member, it is necessary to insert a protrusion formed on the displacement member into the groove of the base member. In this case, when the protrusion of the displacement member is inserted into the groove of the base member and the other member is disposed at a position where it interferes with the displacement member, the displacement member can be used as the base member while avoiding interference with the other member. It is necessary to dispose, and the shapes of the base member, the displacement member, and other members are limited, and the degree of freedom in design is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the guide groove 351 is formed by the two members of the second annular member 362 and the back side guide unit 370, so that the guided member 344 disposed inside the guide groove 351. After the (operation unit 320) is arranged on the second annular member 362 (front side guide unit 360), the second annular member 362 and the rear side guide unit 370 are combined and the operation unit 320 is assembled to the guide unit 350. be able to.

  That is, by providing the guided member 344 in the guide groove 351 on the second annular member 362 side, it is possible to suppress the arrangement of the operation unit 320 on the second annular member 362 from interfering with other members. . As a result, the design freedom of the guide unit 350 and the operation unit 320 can be increased.

  In particular, when the guide groove 351 is molded in the annular guide unit 350 by a mold, the structure of the mold becomes complicated. The guide groove 351 is formed by the second annular member 362 and the back surface. The guide unit 350 can be formed in an annular shape by forming it with two members of the side guide unit 370, forming a guide groove 351 on its split surface, and setting the split direction of the two members as the drawing direction of the mold. Moreover, the structure of each metal mold | die can be simplified, and also the die removal from the metal mold | die after shape | molding the guide groove 351 can be simplified.

  The guide groove 351 has been described as being formed on the inner peripheral surface of the guide unit 350 (second annular member 362). However, the guide groove 351 is formed so as to penetrate in the radial direction of the guide unit 350. It may be a thing.

  When the operation unit 320 that is displaced along the guide unit 350 is disposed inside the annular guide unit 350, the guided member 344 is inserted into the guide groove 351 formed in the guide unit 350. Since the operation unit 320 needs to be inserted inside the guide unit 350 while inserting the guide unit 350, the assembly work of the operation unit 320 and the guide unit 350 is complicated, and the object to be disposed inside the guide groove 351 is also complicated. After the guide member 344 (operation unit 320) is arranged on the second annular member 362 (front side guide unit 360), the second annular member 362 and the rear side guide unit 370 are combined to make the operation unit 320 a guide unit. Since it can be assembled to 350, the assembling work can be simplified.

  The first guide surface 351a and the third guide surface 351c are arranged to face each other with a predetermined interval. The facing distance between the first guide surface 351a and the third guide surface 351c is set larger than the diameter of the guided member 344. Thereby, the movement of the guided member 344 is guided by either the first guide surface 351a or the third guide surface 351c. In the following description, an area (movement area of the guided member 344) formed between the first guide surface 351a and the third guide surface 351c in the guide groove 351 is referred to as a “first guide area”. Will be described.

  The first guide area (the first guide surface 351a and the third guide surface 351c) moves around from the initial position (away from the first end 351e) while approaching the back side (arrow B direction side). It is formed as an inclined guideway extending in the direction. Therefore, the guided member 344 is guided along the first guide region, so that the operation unit 320 rotates around the axes of the second annular member 362 and the back-side guide unit 370 while the second annular ring. It is displaced in the axial direction (arrow FB direction) of the member 362 and the back side guide unit 370.

  When the external force to the operation unit 320 is not input (no operation by the player), the rotation unit 340 is moved toward the front side (arrow F direction side) by the coil spring SP1 described above. In addition to being biased, it is biased in a counterclockwise direction in the front view (rotational direction returning to the initial position) by a base unit 390 (coil spring SP2) described later. Therefore, when the external force to the operation unit 320 is not input while the guided member 344 is in the first guide region (for example, when the player releases his / her hand from the operation unit 320), the coil springs SP1, SP2 Due to the urging force, the guided member 344 is guided to the first end 351e along the first guide surface 351a and returned to the initial position. In the initial position, the guided member 344 is maintained at a position where it abuts against the first end 351e by the urging force of the coil springs SP1 and SP2.

  The second guide surface 351b and the fourth guide surface 351d are formed to face each other. The fourth guide surface 351d extends in a direction in which the guide surface is parallel to the horizontal direction. On the other hand, the second guide surface 351b is formed as a guide surface that inclines toward the front side as it approaches the connecting portion with the first guide surface 351a in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 362 and the first portion 371. The

  The second guide surface 351b and the fourth guide surface 351d are provided on the rear side (arrow B direction side, that is, the first end portion 351e) of the first guide region (first guide surface 351a and third guide surface 351c). To the end on the opposite side. As a result, when the guided member 344 is moved toward the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first guiding region, the guided member 344 is formed on the second guiding surface 351b and the fourth guiding surface 351d. Accepted between opposites.

  The second guide surface 351b and the fourth guide surface 351d are disposed to face each other with a predetermined interval. The minimum facing distance between the second guide surface 351b and the fourth guide surface 351d is set larger than the diameter of the guided member 344. Thereby, the guided member 344 is guided to move by either the second guide surface 351b or the fourth guide surface 351d. In the following description, an area (movement area of the guided member 344) formed between the second guide surface 351b and the fourth guide surface 351d in the guide groove 351 is referred to as a “second guide area”. Will be described.

  The second guide surface 351b extends in the circumferential direction while approaching the front side (arrow F direction side) as it approaches the connecting portion with the first guide surface 351a (that is, as it moves away from the second end 351f). The fourth guide surface 351d extends in the circumferential direction so that the guide surface is perpendicular to the axis of the second annular member 362 and the back side guide unit 370 and parallel to the virtual surface. Formed as a guide surface.

  Therefore, when the guided member 344 is guided along the second guide surface 351b of the second guide region, the operation unit 320 rotates about the axes of the second annular member 362 and the back side guide unit 370. However, the second annular member 362 and the rear side guide unit 370 are displaced in the axial direction (the direction of the arrow FB).

  The inclination angle of the second guide surface 351b is set to be smaller than the inclination angle of the first guide surface 351a. Therefore, the amount of displacement in the axial direction of the operation unit 320 per unit rotation is greater for the guided member 344 along the first guide surface 351a than when the guided member 344 is guided along the second guide surface 351b. The amount of displacement is greater when guided.

  On the other hand, when the guided member 344 is guided along the fourth guide surface 351d in the second guide region, the operation unit 320 is configured to move the axial direction of the second annular member 362 and the back side guide unit 370 (arrow F). −B direction) is not displaced, and only rotation around the axes of the second annular member 362 and the back side guide unit 370 is performed.

  In the state where the guided member 344 is located in the second guide region, if an external force is not input to the operation unit 320 (for example, the player releases his / her hand from the operation unit 320), the coil springs SP1 and SP2 The guided member 344 is guided toward the first guide region along the second guide surface 351b by the urging force, and then returned to the initial position. In this case, since the second guide surface 351b is inclined in the second guide region, the return to the initial position can be performed smoothly.

  The first end 351e is formed at the start end of the first guide region (the end opposite to the connection side with the second guide region), and forms an initial position. In other words, the displacement of the guided member 344 is restricted by the first end portion 351e, so that the operation unit 320 is positioned at the initial position.

  The second end 351f is formed at the end of the second guide region (the end opposite to the connection side with the first guide region) and forms the end position. That is, when the displacement of the guided member 344 is restricted by the second end portion 351f, the operation unit 320 is positioned at the end position.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the operation unit 320 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front by the player's operation (for example, the circular portions 331a and 332a of the gripping unit 330 held by the player are rotated), or The operation unit 320 is operated by a player's operation (for example, the outer peripheral surface facing the player among the mating surfaces (outer peripheral surfaces) of the right cover member 331 and the left cover member 332 of the gripping unit 330 is pushed by the player). Is pushed toward the front side (arrow B direction side) as viewed from the player, the guided member 344 of the operation unit 320 (rotation unit 340) is guided by the first guide region of the guide groove 351.

  In this case, in any operation (rotation or push-in), the guided member 344 is guided by the guide groove 351 (first guide region), so that the operation unit 320 is rotated in the circumferential direction and Displaced (slid) to the side (arrow B direction side).

  That is, when the gripping unit 330 (circular portions 331a and 332a) is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (when only the rotation operation is performed), the grip unit 330 is brought into contact with the first guide surface 351a by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1. The guided member 344 (pressed) is guided (rolled) along the first guide surface 351a, and the operation unit 320 is displaced to the back side (arrow B direction side) while being rotated in the circumferential direction ( Slide).

  On the other hand, when the gripping unit 330 is pushed back (arrow B direction side) (when only the pushing operation is performed), the guided member 344 resists the urging force of the coil spring SP1 and the third guide surface 351c. The guided member 344 is guided (rolled) along the third guide surface 351c, so that the operation unit 320 is rotated in the circumferential direction and the back side (arrow B). It is displaced (slid) to the direction side).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the operation unit 320 is operated even when the direction in which the player's grip unit 330 is operated (in this embodiment, the circumferential direction during the rotation operation and the arrow B direction during the push operation) is different. A similar displacement can be given to the (gripping unit 330). Thereby, the player can arbitrarily select the direction in which the operation unit 320 is operated. As a result, it is easy to enhance the interest of the player.

  In addition, when a button or lever is pressed in one direction or tilted in one direction and slides in one direction or rotates in one direction, the operation tends to be monotonous. While there is a problem that it is difficult to give interest to the operation, in the present embodiment, the operation unit 320 has a rotational displacement or slide in a direction different from the displacement direction due to the slide displacement or rotational displacement caused by the pushing operation or the rotational operation. Since the displacement can be formed, the operation of the operation unit 320 can be easily provided with interest.

  The direction in which the operation unit 320 is pushed to the back side and the direction of the rotation axis when the operation unit 320 is rotated are set in parallel. Thereby, even when the direction in which the player operates the grip unit 330 (in this embodiment, the circumferential direction during the rotation operation and the arrow B direction during the push operation) is different, the operation unit 320 (the grip unit 330) is displaced. Easy to do.

  When the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330) is further operated from the state shown in FIG. 23, the guided member 344 reaches the connecting portion between the first guide region and the second guide region. From this state, the gripping unit 330 (circular portions 331a and 332a) is rotated clockwise in front view by a rotation operation (or an operation combining rotation and push-in), whereby the guided member 344 is guided in the second direction. Guided to the area. Thereafter, the guided member 344 is brought into contact with the second end portion 351f, whereby the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330) is disposed at the end position as shown in FIG.

  In this case, in the second guide region, when the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330) is rotated (that is, when only the rotational force around the axis is applied), the second guide surface is urged by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1. The guided member 344 that is in contact with (pressed against) 351b is guided (rolled) along the second guide surface 351b, whereby the operation unit 320 is rotated in the circumferential direction, and the first 2 With the inclination of the guide surface 351b, it is displaced (slid) to the back side (arrow B direction side).

  Further, when the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330) is operated by an operation that combines rotation and pressing, the guided member 344 that is in contact with (pressed against) the fourth guide surface 351d by the pressing force of the operation. However, by being guided (rolled) along the fourth guide surface 351d, the operation unit 320 is only rotated in the circumferential direction.

  On the other hand, in the second guidance area, the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330) is not displaced only by the pushing operation. That is, in the second guide region, the fourth guide surface 351d is formed as a guide surface that is perpendicular to the axis of the second annular member 362 and the back side guide unit 370 and is parallel to the virtual surface. Even if the guided member 344 is pressed against the fourth guide surface 351d against the biasing force of the coil spring SP1, the guided member 344 is guided to the fourth guide. A force component that rolls along the surface 351d (that is, a force component in a direction in which the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330) is rotated) is not generated. Therefore, the guided member 344 stays at the connecting portion between the first guide region and the second guide region (or on the fourth guide surface 351d), and the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330) is pushed in (arrow B direction). And it is not displaced in any direction of the rotation direction.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, by providing the second guide region, the direction in which the player's grip unit 330 is operated (in this embodiment, the circumferential direction during the rotation operation and the arrow B direction during the push operation) ) Are different, the displacement mode of the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330) can be made different (in this embodiment, the rotation of the operation unit 320 is performed in a rotation operation (or an operation combining rotation and push-in)). The operation unit 320 is stopped only by the pushing operation). Thereby, the player can arbitrarily select the direction in which the operation unit 320 is operated. As a result, it is easy to enhance the interest of the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the operation unit 320 is pushed back from the initial position and guided through the first guide area and reaches the second guide area, the operation direction is changed (that is, rotated). By operating), the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330) can be displaced to the end position. Therefore, the player can change the operation direction from the initial position to the end position (on the way). As a result, the player can be prevented from getting bored with the operation of the operation unit 320.

  In addition, when the operation unit 320 is pushed (slid) to the back side, the guided member 344 is guided while being in contact with the third guide surface 351c and the fourth guide surface 351d of the back side guide unit 370. On the other hand, when the operation unit 320 is rotated clockwise in front view, the guided member 344 is guided while being in contact with the first guide surface 351a and the second guide surface 351b of the second annular member 362.

  That is, the member with which the guided member 344 abuts in the operation direction of the operation unit 320 can be changed. Thereby, the contact surface with the guided member 344 can be set to a shape and material suitable for the operation direction of the operation unit 320.

  For example, during the pushing operation of the operation unit 320, when the guided member 344 is guided by the fourth guide surface 351d, the displacement of the guided member 344 comes into contact with the fourth guide surface 351d and the displacement thereof is regulated. Is greatly acting on the back side guide unit 370, the back side guide unit 370 is set to a material resistant to impact. On the other hand, when the operation unit 320 is rotated, the guided member 344 easily slides and displaces along the first guide surface 351a and the second guide surface 351b, and the second annular member 362 is made of a material resistant to wear. Set. Thereby, it can suppress that only a part of guide surface of the guide groove 351 concentrates and deform | transforms (deteriorates). As a result, the durability of the guide groove 351 can be improved.

  Alternatively, the guide surface of the guide groove 351 may be formed in a step shape so that vibrations that slide on the guide surface are transmitted to a player who operates the operation unit 320. In this case, the third guide surface 351c and the fourth guide surface 351d, and the first guide surface 351a and the second guide surface 351b are assumed to have different inner surface shapes, and vibrations when sliding on the respective guide surfaces are caused. You may set so that it may become a different frequency, respectively, when it is displaced at the same speed. Thereby, the operational feeling of operating the operation unit 320 can be made different on each guide surface.

  Further, the guide surface on which the guided member 344 is guided when the operation unit 320 is pushed (slid) and when the operation unit 320 is rotated is designated as the third guide surface 351c of the back side guide unit 370 and the guide surface. The fourth guide surface 351d can be divided into the first guide surface 351a and the second guide surface 351b of the second annular member 362.

  Thereby, according to the displacement mode of the operation unit 320, the to-be-guided member 344 can be guided along a different guide surface, and the load which a guide surface receives can be disperse | distributed. That is, when the displacement member that is displaced along the guide surface formed on the base member is always moved along a part of the guide surface, the load is concentrated on a part of the guide surface, and the guide surface is In the present embodiment, the guide member 344 can be guided along different guide surfaces according to the displacement mode of the operation unit 320, so that the load is concentrated on a part of the guide surfaces. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rear side guide unit 370 and the second annular member 362 in which the guide groove 351 is formed from being damaged.

  Further, a connecting portion between the second annular member 362 and the rear side guide unit 370 of the guide groove 351 formed of two members is formed at a position different from the guide surface of the guided member 344. Precisely, the connecting portion between the second annular member 362 and the back side guide unit 370 is the connecting portion (connecting portion) of the first end portion 351e and the first guide surface 351a, the second end portion 351f, and the fourth end portion. It is set to the connection part (connection part) of the guide surface 351d.

  Here, when the connecting portion between the second annular member 362 and the rear guide unit 370 is set as the guide surface of the guide groove 351, the second annular member 362 and the rear guide unit 370 are combined. May cause a step on the guide surface of the guide groove 351 due to factors such as errors in assembly (assembly tolerance) and processing accuracy (dimensional tolerance) of the second annular member 362 and the back side guide unit 370. When the guided member 344 guided by 351 passes through the step, it may be caught by the step and easily worn.

  On the other hand, the connecting portion between the second annular member 362 and the back side guide unit 370 of the guide groove 351 formed of two members is formed at a position different from the guide surface of the guided member 344. It is possible to suppress the wear of the guided member 344 that guides 351 from being accelerated.

  The connecting portion between the second annular member 362 and the back side guide unit 370 may be set to a position where it does not contact when the guided member 344 is guided. For example, the second annular member Even if the connecting portion between the member 362 and the rear side guide unit 370 is formed on the first guide surface 351a or the third guide surface 351c at a position separated from the first end 351e by a value smaller than the radius of the guided member 344. Alternatively, the first end 351e and the second end 351f may be formed.

  Further, since the guide unit can be guided along different guide surfaces during the rotation operation and the push-in operation of the operation unit 320, and the guide surface is formed of different members, when the design of the guide groove 351 is changed, Design changes can be simplified. For example, when the displacement mode of the operation unit 320 at the time of pushing is changed, it is not necessary to change the shape of the second annular member 362, and the third guide surface 351c and the fourth guide surface 351d of the back side guide unit 370 are not required. It is only necessary to change the shape.

  The operation direction of the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330) may be appropriately selected by the player, or the operation direction is transmitted to the player according to the contents of the slot machine 10 (auxiliary display unit 15). Display or voice notification), and based on the transmission, the player may change the operation direction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25 and FIG. 26, a guide mode (change in contact surface) of the guided member 344 by the guide groove 351 when the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330) is displaced from the initial position to the end position. explain.

  FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (c) and FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c) are schematic sectional views of the operation unit 320 and the guide unit 350. FIGS. (B) and FIG. 25 (c) and FIG. 26 (a), FIG. 26 (b) and FIG. 26 (c) are respectively shown in FIG. 22 (c), FIG. 23 (c) and FIG. Correspond.

  25A to 25C, the transition state of the guided member 344 when the player rotates the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330) is sequentially illustrated. In FIG. 26C, the player is guided when the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330) is pushed into the guide unit 450 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) and then the operation unit 320 is rotated. The transition states of the member 344 are shown in order.

  25 (a) and 26 (a), the operation unit 320 is disposed at the initial position. In FIGS. 26 (c) and 26 (c), the operation unit 320 is disposed at the end position. Each state is illustrated. In FIG. 25B and FIG. 26B, the guided member 344 is located at a position (hereinafter referred to as “first position”) that becomes the starting end (end on the first guiding area side) of the second guiding area. The arranged state is illustrated.

  25 (a) and 25 (b), when the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330) is rotated by the player (when only the rotational force around the axis is applied to the gripping unit 330). As described above, since the operation unit 320 (the rotation unit 340) is biased to the front side (arrow F direction side) by the coil spring SP1, the guided member 344 has a first guide groove 351. The first guide area is guided by contacting the guide surface 351a and moving along the first guide surface 351a in the circumferential direction (left-right direction in FIG. 25) along the guide groove 351.

  As shown in FIG. 25B, the guided member 344 that has passed through the first guide area and reached the first position of the second guide area has a front surface (that is, a second surface). It is arranged at a position where it abuts against the guide surface 351b).

  As shown in FIGS. 25 (b) and 25 (c), the operation unit 320 starts from a state in which the guided member 344 is located at the first position of the second guide region (in this case, the start end of the second guide surface 351b). When the (grip unit 330) is further rotated by the player (only the rotational force about the axis is applied to the grip unit 330), the guided member 344 is operated by the operation unit 320 (rotation unit 340) as described above. ) Is urged to the front side (arrow F direction side) by the coil spring SP1, so that it comes into contact with the second guide surface 351b of the guide groove 351 and surrounds the guide groove 351 along the second guide surface 351b. It moves to a direction (FIG. 25 left-right direction), and it guides a 2nd guide area | region to the terminal position (position which contact | abuts the 2nd edge part 351f).

  As described above, the second guide surface 351b of the guide groove 351 extends in the circumferential direction (FIG. 25 (c) left-right direction) of the second annular member 362 and the first portion 371, and the first guide surface. As it goes to the connection side with 351a, it is formed so as to incline toward the front side.

  Therefore, when the operation unit 320 is displaced from the initial position to the end position by the rotation operation (that is, when only the rotational force around the axis is applied to the gripping unit 330), the first guide surface 351a and the second guide are provided. As the surface 351b is inclined, the operation unit 320 is displaced to the back side (arrow B direction side) while being rotated (displaced in the circumferential direction).

  As described above, when the operation unit 320 is rotated from the initial position to the end position, the guided member 344 is guided to the first guide area and the second guide area having different extending directions. The amount of slide displacement to the rear side with respect to the rotation amount of the operation unit 320 is changed. That is, the manner of displacement toward the back side is changed while the operation unit 320 is being rotationally displaced. Thereby, interest can be given to the operation of the operation unit 320.

  As shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, when the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330) is pushed toward the back side, only the pushing force in the axial direction is applied to the gripping unit 330. When the axial pushing force is applied to the gripping unit 330 and the rotational force about the axis is also applied), the guided member 344 comes into contact with the third guide portion 351c of the guide groove 351, and the first The first guide area is guided by moving the guide groove 351 in the circumferential direction (left-right direction in FIG. 26) along the three guide surfaces 351c.

  The guided member 344 that has passed through the first guide area and reached the first position of the second guide area, as shown in FIG. 26B, is a surface on the back side of the second guide area (that is, the fourth guide area). It is disposed at a position where it abuts against the guide surface 351d).

  Here, when only the pushing force in the axial direction is applied to the operation unit 320 (the gripping unit 330) and no rotational force about the axis is applied, the guided member 344 is moved to the first guiding region (the third guiding surface). 351c) and reaches the first position of the second guide region (in this case, the start end of the fourth guide surface 351d), the guided member 344 moves to the fourth guide surface 351d (second guide region). Immediately after being guided, the displacement of the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330) is stopped.

  That is, as described above, the fourth guide surface 351d extends in the circumferential direction in a posture that is perpendicular to the axes of the second annular member 362 and the back-side guide unit 370 and parallel to the virtual surface. Therefore, when the guided member 344 reaches the first position of the second guiding region (the start end of the fourth guiding surface 351d) only by the pushing operation, the force acting on the guided member 344 And the extending direction of the fourth guide surface 351d are substantially orthogonal to each other, and no force component in the rotational direction (circumferential direction, left and right direction in FIG. 26B) is generated. 330) cannot be displaced.

  The third guide surface 351c and the fourth guide surface 351d are linear in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 362 and the first portion 371 (FIG. 25 (b) left-right direction). The intersection angle between the third guide surface 351c and the fourth guide surface 351d is set to a predetermined angle (approximately 165 degrees or more and approximately 135 degrees or less, and approximately 150 degrees in the present embodiment).

  Accordingly, when the guided member 344 is guided from the third guide surface 351c (first guide region) to the start end (first position of the second guide region) of the fourth guide surface 351d, the occurrence of an impact is suppressed. However, it is possible to reliably guide to the first position. That is, if the tolerance angle is too large, the impact when the guided member 344 reaches the second guiding region is increased. On the other hand, if the tolerance angle is too small, the guided member 344 is displaced in the circumferential direction (rotation direction). Therefore, the guided member 344 is not smoothly transferred from the first guide area to the second guide area. On the other hand, by setting the tolerance angle, the guided member 344 is transferred from the first guide region to the second guide region while suppressing the impact when the guided member 344 reaches the second guide region. It can be done smoothly.

  As a result, when only the axial pushing force is applied to the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330) and no rotational force around the axis is applied, the guided member 344 is moved to the same position (first position) each time. It can be easily stopped. As a result, the operation feeling (operation amount) of the player operating the operation unit 320 can be made the same, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the operation of the operation unit 320.

  As shown in FIGS. 26B and 26C, the operation unit 320 is moved from the state where the guided member 344 is located at the first position of the second guide region (in this case, the start end of the fourth guide surface 351d). When the (grip unit 330) is further operated by the player (the gripping unit 330 is given a pressing force in the axial direction and is also given a rotational force around the axis), the guided member 344 is moved to the fourth position of the guide groove 351. The guide groove 351 (second guide region) is moved along the fourth guide surface 351d in the circumferential direction (left and right direction in FIG. 26) along the fourth guide surface 351d, and the second guide region is moved to the end position (second end). To a position where it abuts against the portion 351f).

  When the player does not operate the operation unit 320 after the operation unit 320 is pushed and slid to operate the guided member 344 to a position where the guided member 344 contacts the second end 351f, The guided member 334 is guided to the start position along the second guide surface 351b and the first guide surface 351a by the biasing force of the coil springs SP1 and SP2 that act.

  Therefore, when the operation unit 320 is pushed and slid, the guide surfaces (the third guide surface 351c and the fourth guide surface 351d) on which the guided member 344 is guided by these operations, and the coil springs SP1, By differentiating the guide surfaces (second guide surface 351b and first guide surface 351a) on which the guided member 344 is guided by the urging force of SP2, the load received by the contact of the guided member 344 can be efficiently performed. Can be distributed.

  Note that the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330) is rotated from the state where the guided member 344 is positioned at the first position of the second guiding region (the start end of the fourth guiding surface 351d) (that is, the gripping unit 330 is pivoted). When only the rotational force is applied), the guided member 344 has the operation unit 320 (rotating unit 340) biased to the front side (arrow F direction side) by the coil spring SP1 as described above. Accordingly, the guide groove 351 is brought into contact with the second guide surface 351b, and the guide groove 351 is moved along the second guide surface 351b in the circumferential direction, so that the second guide region is moved to the end position (the second end portion 351f). It is guided to the abutting position) (see FIG. 25C).

  Next, the base unit 390 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27A is a front view of the base unit 390, FIG. 27B is a perspective front view of the base unit 390, and FIG. 27C is a line XXVIIc-XXVIIc in FIG. 27A. It is sectional drawing of the base unit 390 in. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective front view of the base unit 390. FIG. 29A is a front view of the base unit 391, and FIG. 29B is a cross-sectional view of the base unit 391 taken along the line XXIXb-XXIXb in FIG. 30 (a) is a front view of the displacement unit 395, FIG. 30 (b) is a rear view of the displacement unit 395, and FIG. 30 (c) is a XXXc-XXXc line in FIG. 30 (a). 3 is a sectional view of a displacement unit 395. FIG.

  In FIGS. 27A to 27C, the displacement unit 395 is biased by the coil spring SP2, and the displacement unit 395 is brought into contact with the second displacement member 397 with the restriction piece 392f of the base unit 391. A state of being disposed at a position (hereinafter referred to as an “initial biasing position”) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 to 30, the base unit 390 includes a base unit 391, a displacement unit 395 disposed in the base unit 391, and a coil spring SP2 that biases the displacement unit 395 against the base unit 391. And mainly.

  The base unit 391 is formed in an outer shape (outer peripheral shape) corresponding to the inner peripheral shape on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the annular member 310 (see FIG. 15) of the displacement unit 300 described above, and on the inner peripheral side thereof. A base member 392 disposed (internally fitted), and a plate spring 393 and a detection device 394 disposed on the base member 392 are mainly provided.

  The base member 392 includes a base plate 392a, a first wall portion 392b that is erected from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 392a and formed in a front view arc shape (substantially C shape), A second wall portion 392c that is coaxial with the first wall portion 392b and has a larger diameter than the first wall portion 392b in a front view arc shape (substantially C-shape), and is erected from the front side of the base plate 392a; A third wall portion 392h that is coaxial with the second wall portion 392c and has an annular shape in front view having a larger diameter than the second wall portion 392c, and is erected from the front side of the base plate 392a; A spring engagement piece 392k, an inner first engagement piece 392d1, an inner second engagement piece 392d2, and a base plate 392a that are protruded from the front side of the 392a and a base plate 392a that are cut out in a substantially U shape when viewed from the front are formed. The control piece 392f is mainly provided.

  The first wall portion 392b is a portion that houses (holds) the rear side end portion of the coil spring SP1 disposed between the intermediate member 380 and the intermediate member 380 (see FIG. 14). It is set larger than the outer diameter of SP1 and is formed (standing) at a position coaxial with the standing portion 385 (see FIG. 15) of the intermediate member 380. In addition, the inner part (the part surrounded by the first wall part 392b) of the first wall part 392b in the base plate 392a is retracted to the back side (arrow F direction side) with respect to the other parts in the base plate 392a. . Thereby, since the depth dimension of the space surrounded by the first wall portion 392b can be ensured, the coil spring SP1 having a large free length can be adopted, and the durability and operational feeling can be improved. Even a long free coil spring SP1 can be stably housed (held).

  The diameter of the second wall portion 392c is set to be larger than the diameter of the first wall portion 392b, and the second wall portion 392c is formed (stands up) at a predetermined distance from the first wall portion 392b. The second wall portion 392c is a wall portion that guides the displacement of a first displacement member 396 (displacement unit 395), which will be described later, and extends along the displacement locus of the first displacement member 396. In other words, the inner diameter of the second wall portion 392c is set to be the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the displacement locus of the first displacement member 396. Although detailed description will be given later, the displacement unit 395 is disposed in a displaceable state between the first wall portion 392b and the second wall portion 392c.

  The second wall portion 392c includes an outer first engagement piece 392e1 and an outer second engagement piece 392e2 projecting radially inward from the inner peripheral surface on the standing tip side. The outer first engagement piece 392e1 and the outer second engagement piece 392e2 are respectively located on the displacement locus of the displacement unit 395 (position overlapping the displacement locus in the front view) and along the circumferential direction of the second wall portion 392c. Are formed at predetermined intervals.

  The outer first engagement piece 392e1 and the outer second engagement piece 392e2 are protrusions that restrict the displacement unit 395 attached (attached) to the base unit 391 from dropping to the front side (arrow F direction side). The space between the base plate 391a and the base plate 391a is formed at a position that is the same as or slightly larger than the thickness of the displacement unit 395 (first displacement member 396) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Accordingly, the displacement unit 395 disposed on the front surface of the base plate 391a can be disposed between the base plate 391a and the outer first engagement piece 392e1 and the outer second engagement piece 392e2 (see FIG. 27). (See (c)).

  The outer diameter of the third wall portion 392h is set to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the second cylindrical portion 362b (see FIG. 14) of the second annular member 362, and is coaxial with the second cylindrical portion 362b. It is formed in the position. As a result, in the assembled state of the displacement unit 300, the front-side end portion (standing tip surface) of the third wall portion 392h is brought into contact with the back-side end portion of the second cylindrical portion 362b. Thereby, unauthorized access from the outside to the inside of the displacement unit 300 can be suppressed.

  The spring engaging piece 392k is a portion that engages one end of a coil spring SP2 that urges a displacement unit 395, which will be described later, and protrudes from the front side of the base plate 392a and has a protruding tip opposite to the displacement unit 395. It is formed in an L shape in a side view bent toward the side.

  The inner first engagement piece 392d1 and the inner second engagement piece 392d2 are members that guide displacement of a displacement unit 395, which will be described later, and restrict its removal (removal). The inner first engagement piece 392d1 and the inner second engagement piece 392d2 are located radially inward of the displacement trajectory of the displacement unit 395 in a front view, and stand from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 392a. The first portion (standing portion) to be provided and the first portion protruding from the protruding tip end radially inwardly overlap the displacement locus of the displacement unit 395 (in the front view, overlap the displacement locus) 2nd part (projection part) located in position).

  The first portion (standing portion) of the inner first engagement piece 392d1 and the inner second engagement piece 392d2 is disposed at a position facing the inner peripheral surface of the displacement unit 395. The portion (standing portion) guides the displacement of the displacement unit 395 in the circumferential direction, and restricts the displacement unit 395 from moving inward in the radial direction.

  The first portion (the standing portion) of the inner first engagement piece 392d1 and the inner second engagement piece 392d2 has an outer peripheral surface (a surface on the side facing the displacement unit 395) that is first in a front view. It is formed as a circumferential surface that is concentric with the wall portion 392b. Thereby, the displacement of the displacement unit 395 in the circumferential direction can be smoothly guided.

  The facing distance between the second portion (projecting portion) of the inner first engagement piece 392d1 and the inner second engagement piece 392d2 and the base plate 391a is the front-rear direction of the displacement unit 395 (first displacement member 396). The thickness is set to be the same as or slightly larger than the thickness in the direction of arrow FB. Thus, the displacement unit 395 disposed on the front surface of the base plate 391a is placed between the base plate 391a and the second portion (projecting portion) of the inner first engagement piece 392d1 and the inner second engagement piece 392d2. (See FIG. 27C).

  The restricting piece 392f is a member that restricts the displacement of the displacement unit 395 to one side (defines an initial biasing position), and is between the first wall portion 392b and the second wall portion 392c in a front view. In this case, it is formed at a position overlapping with the displacement locus of the displacement unit 395 in the front view.

  The restriction piece 392f is an elastic piece whose base end is connected to the base plate 392a and one end side extended from the base end is a free end by cutting the base plate 392a into a substantially U shape when viewed from the front. Formed as. In the restricting piece 392f, the direction in which one end side extends from the base end side is opposite to the biasing direction of the coil spring SP2 (the direction of the force biasing the displacement unit 395 toward the initial biasing position). The The restricting piece 392f includes a convex portion 392f1 protruding from the front surface on the one end side (the surface on the arrow F direction side), and the convex portion 392f1 comes into contact with the displacement unit 395 (second displacement member 397). Thus, the displacement of the displacement unit 395 to one side is restricted (the displacement unit 395 is disposed at the initial biasing position).

  The base plate 392a includes a standing portion 392j that protrudes from the front side (arrow F direction side) and is positioned between the outer peripheral surface of the first wall portion 392b and the inner peripheral surface of the second wall portion 392c. The standing portion 392j is a portion that regulates the displacement of the displacement unit 395 to the other side (defines the end of displacement of the displacement unit 395), and is formed at a position facing the end of the displacement locus of the displacement unit 395. .

  The base plate 392a is formed with an opening 392g on the inner peripheral side of the third wall 392h (between the third wall 392h and the coil spring SP2). A wiring (not shown) extending from the vibration device 333 (see FIG. 18) can be routed to the back side (outside) of the displacement unit 300 through the opening 392g.

  The leaf spring 393 is a plate-like spring (leaf spring) that is elastically deformed by contact with the second displacement member 397 when the displacement unit 395 is displaced, and is adjacent to the displacement locus of the displacement unit 395 ( It is arranged on the inner circumference side of the displacement locus. The leaf spring 393 includes a protrusion 393a that protrudes toward the base plate 392a.

  The protrusion 393a is inserted into a recess 392m provided in the base plate 392a. As a result, when the leaf spring 393 is elastically deformed by contact with the second displacement member 397 and then the leaf spring 393 is elastically recovered with the passage of the second displacement member 397, the protrusion 393a is formed in the recess 392m. It can be brought into contact (collision) with the inner surface.

  The leaf spring 393 is disposed on the base plate 392a in an elastically deformed state. That is, in a state where the displacement unit 395 (second displacement member 397) is not in contact with the plate spring 393, the plate spring 393 makes contact (pressing) the protrusion 393a with the inner surface of the recess 392m by its elastic recovery force. It is assumed to be in a state of letting

  Further, the leaf spring 393 is in a position where the leaf spring 393 comes into contact with the displacement unit 395 (first displacement member 396) when the protrusion 393a is not in contact with the inner surface of the recess 392m (the pressure is released) and elastically recovered. Be placed. Accordingly, when the protrusion 393a of the leaf spring 393 is damaged, the leaf spring 393 can be brought into contact with the first displacement member 396. Accordingly, even when the protrusion 393a of the leaf spring 393 is damaged, the leaf spring 393 is elastically deformed by contact with the second displacement member 397, and then the leaf spring 393 is elastically recovered as the second displacement member 397 passes. Thus, the leaf spring 393 can be brought into contact (collision) with the first displacement member 396.

  The detection device 394 is a sensor device that detects the position of the displacement unit 395. The detection device 394 includes an irradiation unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that is opposed to be able to receive light emitted from the irradiation unit. The position of the displacement unit 395 is detected based on the fact that the detection piece 396f of the displacement unit 395 is arranged between them and the light is blocked.

  The displacement unit 395 mainly includes a first displacement member 396 and a second displacement member 397 that is rotatably supported by the first displacement member 396.

  The first displacement member 396 includes a main body 396a formed in a shape curved in an arc shape when viewed from the front (a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape at two positions (positions whose phases are different by 180 degrees)), and a main body 396a. Spring engaging portion 396c formed in a substantially C shape at one end side in the longitudinal direction (circumferential direction) of the main body 396a and the arc center of the main body portion 396a at the other end side in the longitudinal direction (circumferential direction) ) Projecting portion 396b projecting toward the outer periphery, engaging portion 396d positioned along the inner edge of main body portion 396a and thinner than the other portions, and the outer peripheral edge of main body portion 396a An outer recessed portion 396e formed by cutting out the portion, a detection piece 396f projecting radially outward from an edge on the outer peripheral side of the main body portion 396a, and a cylindrical projection on the back surface of the main body portion 396a. The shaft portion 396h provided is mainly provided.

  The main body 396a has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the second wall 392c of the base plate 392a, and an inner diameter (an inner diameter of the engaging portion 396d) of the main body 396a is outside the first wall 392b of the base plate 392a. The diameter is set larger than the diameter. Thereby, the 1st displacement member 396 can be arrange | positioned between the 1st wall part 392b and the 2nd wall part 392c of the base board 392a.

  Specifically, the inner diameter of the main body portion 396a (engagement portion 396d) is a virtual circle concentric with the first wall portion 392b, and is the first of the inner first engagement piece 392d1 and the inner second engagement piece 392d2. The diameter is set to be the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the imaginary circle passing through the outer peripheral surface of the portion (standing portion). As a result, the inner peripheral side of the engaging portion 396d slides on the outer peripheral surface of the first portion (standing portion) of the inner first engaging piece 392d1 and the inner second engaging piece 392d2, thereby causing the first displacement. The displacement of the member 396 in the circumferential direction is guided.

  In addition, the back surface (the surface on the arrow B side) of the main body 396a is a front surface of the first surface 396a1 serving as the back surface on the other end side (the protruding portion 396b side) in the longitudinal direction (circumferential direction) and the first surface 396a1. The first surface 396a1 and the second surface 3969a2 are formed on the second surface 396a2 that is located on the side (arrow F direction side) and is the back surface on one end side (spring engagement portion 396c side) in the longitudinal direction (circumferential direction). The step in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is connected by a wall surface 396g. The first surface 396a1 and the second surface 396a2 are formed in parallel to each other.

  The wall surface 396g is formed so as to be bent in a crank shape when viewed from the back, and the second displacement member 397 is engaged with the crank portion to restrict the displacement of the second displacement member 397. The first crank surface 396g1 And a second crank surface 396g2 and a contact surface 396g3 connecting them.

  The first crank surface 396g1 is located on the radially outer side (outer peripheral side) of the main body portion 396a, and the second crank surface 396g2 is located on the radially inner side (inner peripheral side) of the main body portion 396a. The second crank surface 396g2 is positioned so as to recede from the first crank surface 396g1 in the longitudinal direction (circumferential direction) one end side (spring engagement portion 396c side) of the main body 396a. A step is formed between the second crank surface 396g2 and the step is connected by the contact surface 396g3.

  The projecting portion 396b is on the displacement locus of the engagement piece 342b of the operation unit 320, and the displacement direction side (traveling direction) of the engagement piece 342b when the operation unit 320 is displaced from the initial position toward the end position. It is disposed at a position which becomes the front side.

  Therefore, when the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330) is displaced from the initial position toward the end position, the projecting portion 396b is pushed by the engagement piece 342b to move the engagement piece 342b in the displacement direction. In conjunction with this, the displacement unit 395 is displaced from the initial biasing position. As a result, the coil spring SP2 is elastically extended, and a predetermined operational feeling is imparted to the operation of the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330) by the biasing force of the coil spring SP2.

  On the other hand, when the operation of the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330) is released at the end position (or between the start position and the end position) (for example, when the player releases the hand from the grip unit 330). The displacement unit 395 is displaced (returned) toward the initial biasing position by the elastic restoring force of the coil spring SP2 that is elastically extended. As a result, contrary to the case described above, the engagement piece 342b is pushed by the projecting portion 396b, thereby being interlocked in the displacement direction of the projecting portion 396b, and the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330) is moved to the initial position. Is displaced (returned).

  The coil spring SP2 has one end engaged with the spring engagement piece 392k of the base plate 392a and the other end engaged with the spring engagement portion 396c of the displacement unit 395 (first displacement member 396). In the urging position, it is arranged in an elastically stretched state. Therefore, the displacement unit 395 (first displacement member 396) is biased toward the initial bias position by the elastic recovery force of the coil spring SP2.

  The engaging portion 396d has a thickness in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) set to be smaller than the thickness in the front-rear direction of the main body portion 396a, and the back surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) is the main body portion 396a. It is formed so as to be connected to the back surface. That is, the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the engaging portion 396d is positioned so as to recede to the back surface side (the arrow B direction side) from the front surface of the main body portion 396a.

  Here, when the first displacement member 396 (displacement unit 395) is disposed (attached) to the base member 392 (base unit 391), the engagement portion 396d is connected to the base plate 392a and the inner first engagement piece. It is arrange | positioned between facing 392d1 and the 2nd part (projection part) of the inner side 2nd engaging piece 392d2. Accordingly, the engagement portion 396d is formed to be smaller (thinner) than the main body portion 396a, so that the inner first engagement piece 392d1 and the inner second engagement piece 392d2 protrude from the base plate 392a. The installation dimension (the height of the first portion (standing portion)) can be reduced (shortened). As a result, the inner first engagement piece 392d1 and the inner second engagement piece 392d2 are secured, and the inner first engagement piece 392d1 and the inner second engagement piece 392d2 are elastically deformed or damaged. This can be suppressed. As a result, the first displacement member 396 can be stably displaced.

  The engaging portion 396d is partially cut away from the edge portion on the radially inner side (first wall portion 392b side) toward the main body portion 396a side (the radially outer side) to form a substantially rectangular shape in front view. The inner first recessed portion 396d1 and the inner second recessed portion 396d2 are provided. The inner first recessed portion 396d1 and the inner second recessed portion 396d2 are disposed on the inner side when the first displacement member 396 (displacement unit 395) is disposed (attached) to the base member 392 (base unit 391). The first engaging piece 392d1 and the second portion (projecting portion) of the inner second engaging piece 392d2 are notches for inserting the engaging portion 396d on the front side, and the inner first recessed portion The spacing dimension in the circumferential direction of 396d1 and the inner second recessed portion 396d2 is set to the same dimension as the spacing dimension in the circumferential direction of the inner first engagement piece 392d1 and the inner second engagement piece 392d2. .

  The outer recessed portion 396e allows the outer second engagement piece 392e2 to be attached to the first displacement member 396 when the first displacement member 396 (displacement unit 395) is disposed (attached) to the base member 392 (base unit 391). It is a notch for passing through the front side of the main body 396a. Accordingly, the outer recessed portion 396e is inserted when the inner first engaging piece 392d1 and the inner second engaging piece 392d2 of the base member 392 are inserted into the inner first recessed portion 396d1 and the inner second recessed portion 396d2, respectively. The outer second engagement piece 392e2 is formed at a position where it can be received (inserted).

  The inner first engaging piece 392d1, the inner second engaging piece 392d2, and the outer second engaging piece 392e2 are inserted into the inner first recessed portion 396d1, the inner second recessed portion 396d2, and the outer recessed portion 396e, respectively. In a state where the first displacement member 396 (displacement unit 395) is disposed at a position where it can be performed, the outer first engagement piece 392e1 is adjacent to the other end side in the longitudinal direction (circumferential direction) of the first displacement member 396. (That is, at a position that does not overlap the first displacement member 396 in front view) (see FIG. 31).

  The outer recessed portion 396e is formed between the inner first recessed portion 396d1 and the inner second recessed portion 396d2 in the extending direction of the main body portion 396a. Thereby, the part by which rigidity is made low by being recessed can be disperse | distributed to the extending direction of the main-body part 396a. As a result, it is possible to suppress breakage of the main body 396a by concentrating the low rigidity portion on a part of the main body 396a.

  The thickness of the detection piece 396f is set to be smaller (thin) than the thickness of the main body 396a, and the front surface is raised to the front side (arrow F direction side) from the front side of the first displacement member 396. Is done. The second wall portion 392c of the base member 392 has a notch 392c1 cut out (recessed) in a region overlapping the displacement locus of the detection piece 396f in a front view, and the detection piece is interposed via the notch 392c1. 396f projects outward in the radial direction of the second wall portion 392c. Thereby, interference with the 2nd wall part 392c and the detection piece 396f can be suppressed.

  The shaft portion 396h is a columnar shaft that rotatably supports the second displacement member 397, and protrudes from the second surface 396a2 of the main body portion 396a toward the back surface side.

  The projecting dimension (projecting height) of the shaft portion 396h from the second surface 396a2 is based on the distance T1 in the front-rear direction from the first surface 396a1 to the rear side end portion of the main body portion 396a (see FIG. 30C). Is also set to a small dimension. Thereby, when the 1st displacement member 396 (displacement unit 395) displaces with respect to the base member 392, it can suppress that the protrusion front-end | tip of the axial part 396h contact | abuts to the base board 392a of the base member 392. Thereby, breakage of the shaft portion 396h can be suppressed. Further, the frictional resistance can be suppressed and the displacement of the first displacement member 396 can be stabilized.

  The second displacement member 397 is formed in a plate shape having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and a shaft support hole 397a is formed through the plate body in the front-rear direction. In the following description, the three tip portions (corner portions) of the second displacement member 397 in front view are referred to as a first corner portion 397b, a second corner portion 397c, and a third corner portion 397d.

  The shaft support hole 397a is a hole into which the shaft portion 396h of the first displacement member 396 is inserted, and the inner diameter thereof is set to be approximately the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 396h. As a result, the second displacement member 397 is rotatable about the shaft portion 396h.

  The second displacement member 397 has a thickness dimension T2 (see FIG. 30C) in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) in the front-rear direction from the first surface 396a1 to the rear side end of the main body 396a. The dimension is set smaller than T1 (see FIG. 30C) (T2> T1).

  Thus, when the second displacement member 397 is disposed on the first displacement member 396, the second displacement member 397 is positioned between the second surface 396a2 of the first displacement member 396 and the base plate 392a of the base member 392. It can suppress being pinched by. As a result, the second displacement member 397 can be reliably rotated.

  The first corner 397b is disposed on the radially inner side (the center side of the arc of the main body 396a, the first wall 392b side) of the main body 396a of the first displacement member 396. When the second displacement member 397 is displaced (rotated) with respect to the first displacement member 396, the first corner portion 397b is radially inward (inward of the radially inner inner edge of the main body portion 396a) (in front view). A position (first position (see FIG. 37 (b))) that protrudes toward the center of the arc of the main body 396a and the first wall 392b side, and a position that is radially outward from the first position (second position). (See FIG. 38C)). In the first position, a part of the displacement locus of the first corner 397b when the first displacement member 396 is displaced is set to a position that overlaps the leaf spring 393 of the base unit 391, and in the second position, The displacement locus of the first corner 397b when the one displacement member 396 is displaced is set at a position where it does not overlap (different) with the leaf spring 393 of the base unit 391.

  The second corner 397c is disposed closer to the wall surface 396g than the shaft support hole 397a (shaft portion 396h). When viewed from the front, the distance T3 (see FIG. 30B) from the center of the shaft support hole 397a (shaft portion 396h) to the tip of the second corner portion 397c is from the first crank surface 396g1 of the wall surface 396g to the shaft support hole. 397a (shaft portion 396h) is set to a dimension smaller than the distance T4 (see FIG. 30B) to the center (T4> T3), and from the second crank surface 396g2 of the wall surface 396g to the shaft support hole 397a (shaft The dimension is set to be larger than the distance T5 (see FIG. 30B) to the center of the portion 396h) (T3> T5).

  As a result, when the second displacement member 397 is rotated with respect to the first displacement member 396 about the shaft support hole 397a (shaft portion 396h), the displacement locus of the second corner portion 397c becomes the contact surface 396g3 of the wall surface 396g. It can be set at the position where it overlaps. As a result, the rotation (displacement) of the second displacement member 397 with respect to the first displacement member 396 can be restricted by bringing the side wall of the second corner 397c on the first corner 397b side into contact with the contact surface 396g3.

  Therefore, since the rotation (displacement) of the second displacement member 397 can be regulated using the wall surface 396g formed by the step between the first surface 396a1 and the second surface 396a2 of the main body 396a, the main body 396a is newly added. There is no need to form a portion that restricts the displacement of the second displacement member 397. Therefore, the displacement unit 395 can be prevented from becoming large, and a space for disposing the displacement unit 395 can be easily secured.

  The third corner 397d sandwiches the shaft support hole 397a (shaft portion 396h) and is opposite to the first corner 397b (the radially outer side of the main body 396a of the first displacement member 396 (the arc of the main body 396a). On the side opposite to the center of the second wall 392c side)).

  The third corner 397d has a distance from the tip thereof to the center of the shaft support hole 397a (shaft portion 396h) from the shaft support hole 397a (shaft portion 396h) to the radially outer edge of the main body 396a. The position is set to a dimension larger than the distance, and the second displacement member 397 is rotated (displaced) with respect to the first displacement member 396 to protrude from the radially outer edge of the main body portion 396a, and the first position of the main body portion 396a. It is displaced between the two surfaces 396a2 and a position overlapping in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

  Next, an attachment method for attaching the displacement unit 395 to the base unit 391 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31 is a front view of the base unit 390. 32A is a partial cross-sectional schematic view of the base unit 390 taken along the line XXXIIa-XXXIIa in FIG. 31, and FIG. 32B is a partial cross-sectional schematic view of the base unit 390 taken along the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb in FIG. FIG. FIG. 33A is a schematic partial sectional view of the base unit 390 taken along the line XXXIIIa-XXXIIIa in FIG. 27A, and FIG. 33B is a base unit taken along the line XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb in FIG. 390 is a partial cross-sectional schematic view of 390. FIG.

  31, FIG. 32 (a) and FIG. 32 (b), a position for pushing the displacement unit 395 toward the back side (arrow B direction side) with respect to the base unit 391 (hereinafter referred to as “positioning position”). FIG. 33 (a) and FIG. 33 (b) show a state in which the displacement unit 395 is arranged at the initial urging position. Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, in order to attach (arrange) the displacement unit 395 to the base unit 391, first, the inner first recessed portion 396d1 of the first displacement member 396 (displacement unit 395), The inner second recessed portion 396d2 and the outer recessed portion 396e are the first inner engagement piece 392d1, the inner second engagement piece 392d2, and the second outer engagement piece of the base member 392 (base unit 391). The first displacement member 396 (displacement unit 395) is disposed at a position overlapping with 392e2 in a front view, and the first displacement member 396 (displacement unit 395) faces the base plate 392a of the base member 392 (base unit 391). (In the direction of arrow B)

  As shown in FIGS. 32A and 32B, the displacement unit 395 has the second displacement member 397 on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) at the projecting tip of the convex portion 392f1 of the restriction piece 392f of the base plate 392a. The regulating piece 392f is pushed toward the base plate 392a while being elastically deformed toward the back side (arrow B direction side). Accordingly, the first displacement member 396 (displacement unit 395) is disposed at the positioning position.

  Here, in the second displacement member 397, only the shaft portion 396h of the first displacement member 396 is inserted into the shaft support hole 397a (that is, no stopper is provided), and the shaft portion 396h extends from the shaft portion 396h to the shaft. It can be displaced in the direction. Therefore, when the displacement unit 395 is attached (arranged) to the base unit 391, it is necessary to assemble so that the second displacement member 397 does not fall off from the first displacement member 396 (does not fall off from the shaft portion 396h). In this case, if the worker works while holding the second displacement member 397 with his / her finger, the working efficiency is deteriorated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the displacement unit 395 is arranged at the positioning position, the displacement unit 395 is moved to the base unit while the projecting tip of the projection 392f1 of the restriction piece 392f is brought into contact with the second displacement member 397. Thus, it is possible to suppress the second displacement member 397 from dropping off from the shaft portion 396h of the first displacement member 396. As a result, it is not necessary for the operator to hold the second displacement member 397 with fingers, and work efficiency can be improved accordingly.

  In particular, since the convex portion 392f1 of the restriction piece 392f protrudes toward the displacement unit 395, when the displacement unit 395 is assembled to the base unit 391, the protrusion of the convex portion 392f1 of the restriction piece 392f is provided from an early stage. The tip can be brought into contact with the second displacement member 397. Therefore, workability when the displacement unit 395 is assembled to the base unit 391 can be further improved.

  After disposing the displacement unit 395 at the positioning position (see FIG. 32), the displacement unit 395 is then moved to the other end side in the circumferential direction of the main body 396a (the side where the projecting portion 396b is formed, FIG. ) And the lower side of FIG. 33 (b) are displaced in a direction in which the base plate 329a approaches the upright portion 392j.

  In this case, the displacement unit 395 moves while bringing the second displacement member 397 into contact with the convex portion 392f1 of the restriction piece 392f, and when the second displacement member 397 passes the convex portion 392f1 of the restriction piece 392f, it is shown in FIG. As described above, the elastically deformed restricting piece 392f is restored to the initial shape (returned to the state where it is not elastically deformed), and the displacement unit 395 is disposed at the initial biasing position.

  When the displacement unit 395 is disposed at the initial urging position, the side surface of the convex portion 392f1 of the restricting piece 392f is brought into contact with the side surface of the second displacement member 397, so that the displacement unit 395 is positioned (see FIG. 32). Displacement to position) is restricted.

  In the initial biasing position, as described above, the coil spring SP2 is displaced in the direction in which the displacement unit 395 is displaced toward the positioning position by its elastic recovery force (the side surface of the second displacement member 397 is the convex portion of the regulating piece 392f). The direction of contact with the side surface of 392f1, the upper side in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b)) is urged.

  Further, when the displacement unit 395 is disposed at the initial biasing position, the inner first recessed portion 396d1, the inner second recessed portion 396d2, and the outer recessed portion 396e of the first displacement member 396 (displacement unit 395). Are not overlapped in front view with respect to each of the first inner engagement piece 392d1, the second inner engagement piece 392d2, and the second outer engagement piece 392e2 of the base member 392 (base unit 391) (different from each other). Position).

  Thus, the engaging portion 396d of the displacement unit 395 is disposed between the inner first engaging piece 392d1 and the second portion (projecting portion) of the inner second engaging piece 392d2 and the base plate 392a. Is done. The main body 396a of the displacement unit 395 is disposed between the outer first engaging piece 392e1 and the outer second engaging piece 392e2 and the base plate 392a.

  That is, in a front view, the second portion (projecting portion) of the inner first engagement piece 392d1 and the inner second engagement piece 392d2 is the inner side of the engagement portion 396d of the displacement unit 395 (first displacement member 396). The outer first engaging piece 392e1 and the outer second engaging piece 392e2 are located in the non-formation region of the first recessed portion 396d1 and the inner second recessed portion 396d2, and the main body portion of the displacement unit 395 (first displacement member 396). 396a is disposed at a position overlapping with the non-forming region of the outer recessed portion 396e.

  As a result, the displacement unit 395 (first displacement member 396) is displaced toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) with respect to the base unit 391. The inner first engagement piece 392d1 and the inner second engagement piece 392d2 are displaced by the displacement unit 395 (see FIG. The outer first engagement piece 392e1 and the outer second engagement piece 392e2 are engaged with the main body 396a of the displacement unit 395 (first displacement member 396), respectively, with the engagement portion 396d of the first displacement member 396). Therefore, it is regulated. Thereby, the displacement unit 395 is held by the base unit 391 in a state where only displacement in the circumferential direction is allowed.

  Here, for example, in a structure in which the first displacement member 396 is not formed with the inner first recessed portion 396d1, the inner second recessed portion 396d2, and the outer recessed portion 396e, the displacement unit 395 is engaged with the inner first engagement. The base 390 is pushed into the base unit 390 (base plate 392a) at a position that does not overlap with the piece 392d1, the inner second engagement piece 392d2, the outer first engagement piece 392e1, and the outer second engagement piece 392e2 (the restriction piece 392f is pushed). (See FIG. 32). Therefore, the displacement amount of the displacement unit 395 from the pushed-in position to the initial urging position becomes large, and the workability of the assembling work is lowered. In addition, it is necessary to secure a space for pushing the displacement unit 395 into the base unit 390 (base plate 392a) accordingly, and it is impossible to stand a rib or form other parts. Space efficiency becomes worse.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first displacement member 396 is formed with an inner first recess 396d1, an inner second recess 396d2, and an outer recess 396e, and these recesses 396d1, 396d2, 396e. The inner first engagement piece 392d1, the inner second engagement piece 392d2, and the outer second engagement piece 392e2 of the base member 392 are inserted through the base member 392. That is, the overlap margin between the displacement unit 395 and the displacement locus of the displacement unit 395 at the position where the displacement unit 395 is pushed into the base unit 390 (base plate 392a) can be increased. As a result, the displacement amount of the displacement unit 395 from the pushed-in position (positioning position) to the initial biasing position can be reduced, and the workability of the assembly work can be improved. Further, since the space reserved in the base unit 390 (base plate 392a) for pushing the displacement unit 395 can be reduced accordingly, space efficiency can be improved (space for standing ribs or forming other parts). Can be secured).

  Further, the second surface 396a2 of the main body 396a is disposed on the front side of the regulating piece 392f, and the regulating piece 392f is not visible in the front view. Thereby, it is difficult to access the restriction piece 392f from the front side of the base unit 391, and the restriction of the displacement unit 395 by the restriction piece 392f can be suppressed from being illegally released.

  The distance from the contact position between the convex portion 392f1 of the restricting piece 392f and the second displacement member 397 in the extending direction of the main body 396a to the tip of the second surface 396a2 (the end on the spring engaging portion 396c side) is The first displacement member 396 (displacement unit 395) is set larger than the displaceable distance. Thereby, even after the first displacement member (displacement unit 395) is displaced, it is difficult to access the restriction piece 392f from the front side of the base unit 391.

  Further, the convex portion 392f1 of the restriction piece 392f protrudes into a space formed by a step between the first surface 396a1 and the second surface 396a2 of the main body portion 396a. Thereby, when the displacement unit 395 is arrange | positioned in the base member 392, it can suppress that the thickness of the base unit 391 in the front-back direction becomes thick.

  Next, the displacement of the displacement unit 395 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the displacement unit 300, and FIGS. 35A to 35C are front views of the base unit 390.

  34, the displacement unit 300 is disassembled between the base unit 390 and the intermediate member 380, and the illustration of the coil spring SP1 disposed between the base unit 390 and the intermediate member 380 is omitted. 35A to 35C, the outer shape of the engagement piece 342b of the back side member 342 of the operation unit 320 is illustrated by a chain line.

  FIG. 35A illustrates a state in which the operation unit 320 is disposed at the initial position and the displacement unit 395 is disposed at the initial biasing position. In FIG. 35C, the operation unit 320 is disposed at the end position. FIG. 35B shows a state in which the displacement unit 395 is disposed at the position where the displacement unit 395 is displaced maximum from the initial biasing position (hereinafter referred to as “end interlocking position”). In FIG. 35B, the operation unit 320 is displaced from the initial position. The state in which the engagement piece 342b of the operation unit 320 is disposed at a position where it is in contact with the displacement unit 395 (hereinafter referred to as “contact position”) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 (a), the engaging piece 342b of the back side member 342 has a tip at the side surface (inside of the protruding portion 396b of the first displacement member 396) in the assembled state of the displacement unit 300. It arrange | positions in the position which faces the 1st recessed part 396d1. In the state where the operation unit 320 is disposed at the initial position, the engagement piece 342b is disposed at a predetermined interval from the side surface of the protruding portion 396b.

  As shown in FIG. 35B, when the operation unit 320 is displaced with respect to the guide unit 350, the engagement piece 342 b is rotated (displaced) in the same direction as the operation unit 320. Thereby, the engagement piece 342b is brought into contact with the side surface of the projecting portion 396b.

  The position of the operation unit 320 when the projecting portion 396b is brought into contact with the engagement piece 342b is set between the initial position and the first position. Accordingly, as described above, when the player pushes the operation unit 320 from the initial position, the guided member 344 comes into contact with the fourth guide surface 351d (see FIG. 26B) of the second guide region. Before, the engagement piece 342b can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 396b. Therefore, before the guided member 344 reaches the first position (the guided member 344 reaches the fourth guide surface 351d), a resistance force (biasing force of the coil spring SP2) that opposes the pushing direction of the gripping unit 330 is applied. be able to. As a result, the impact when the guided member 344 comes into contact with the fourth guide surface 351d can be suppressed, and damage to the guided member 344 and the fourth guide surface 351d can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIGS. 35 (b) and 35 (c), after the engaging piece 342b comes into contact with the projecting portion 396b, the engaging piece 342b is moved while the operation unit 320 is displaced to the end position. It is rotated (displaced) in the same direction as the operation unit 320. That is, since the contact between the engagement piece 342b and the protruding portion 396b is maintained, the urging force (elastic recovery force) of the coil spring SP2 can continue to act as an operational feeling when operating the operation unit 320. it can.

  It should be noted that a position adjacent to the projecting portion 396b when the operation unit 320 is disposed at the end position (a front side in the advancing direction of the projecting portion 396b when proceeding toward the end position) stands from the base plate 392a. A standing portion 392j is provided. Accordingly, when the coil spring SP2 or the guided member 344 of the displacement unit 395 is damaged, the displacement unit 395 is brought into contact with the standing portion 392j, and the displacement unit 395 is displaced beyond the end interlocking position. Can be suppressed.

  A leaf spring 393 disposed on the base unit 391 is disposed on the displacement locus of the second displacement member 397 of the displacement unit 395. Therefore, when the displacement unit 395 is displaced from the initial biasing position to the end interlocking position, the second displacement member of the displacement unit 395 is in the middle of the displacement (in the present embodiment, immediately before reaching the end interlocking position). 397 can contact the leaf spring 393 and elastically deform the leaf spring 393. Details of the leaf spring 393 will be described later.

  As described above, the displacement unit 395 is biased toward the initial biasing position by the biasing force (elastic recovery force) of the coil spring SP2. Therefore, when the operation of the operation unit 320 is released (for example, when the player releases his / her hand from the gripping unit 330), the displacement unit 395 is displaced toward the initial urging position. The engagement piece 342b is pushed back by the protruding portion 396b of the unit 395, and as a result, the operation unit 320 is returned to the initial position.

  Next, the leaf spring 393 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 is a front view of the base unit 390, and FIGS. 37 and 38 are partially enlarged front views of the base unit 390. FIG.

  36 to 38, the first displacement member 396 is illustrated in a transparent manner, and the outer shape of the first displacement member 396 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. FIG. 36 shows a state in which the displacement unit 395 is disposed at the initial biasing position.

  37 (a) to 38 (d), the transition states when the displacement unit 395 is displaced from the initial biasing position to the end interlocking position are illustrated in order, and in FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (d), the transition state is illustrated. The transition states when the displacement unit 395 is displaced from the end interlocking position to the initial biasing position are sequentially illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the leaf spring 393 has a free end at the other end opposite to the one end fixed to the base member 392, and the plate surface faces the displacement unit 395 (first displacement member 396). Arranged. Therefore, the leaf spring 393 can be elastically deformed in the direction in which the other end side approaches or separates from the displacement unit 395. The leaf spring 393 is disposed in such a posture that one end side is closer to the coil spring SP2 side than the other end side.

  The leaf spring 393 includes a projecting portion that is formed to be bent in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front side between the one end side and the other end side, and projects the bent tip toward the displacement unit 395 (first displacement member 396). The protruding portion of the leaf spring 393 is arranged at least partially on the bent tip side at a position overlapping the displacement locus of the second displacement member 397 in front view, and when the displacement unit 395 is displaced, as will be described later. The side surface of the protrusion is brought into contact (pressed) with the second displacement member 397, whereby the leaf spring 393 is elastically deformed.

  The leaf spring 393 includes a protrusion 393a that protrudes from the edge on the other end side toward the back side (arrow B direction). When the protrusion 393a is inserted inside the recess 392m of the base plate 392a and the leaf spring 393 is disposed at the initial position (the leaf spring 393 is unloaded), the protrusion 393a contacts the inner surface of the recess 392m. Touched.

  As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37 (a), in the state where the displacement unit 395 is disposed at the initial biasing position, the second side wall 397f (first corner) of the second displacement member 397 is urged by the biasing force of the coil spring SP2. The side surface connecting the portion 397b and the third corner portion 397d) is in contact with the restricting piece 392f (convex portion 392f1) of the base plate 392a. Thereby, the second displacement member 397 is arranged in a posture in which the tip end portion of the first corner portion 397b protrudes radially inward of the first displacement member 396 (main body portion 396a) when viewed from the front.

  When the displacement unit 395 is displaced from the initial biasing position toward the end interlocking position by the operation of the operation unit 320, the second displacement member 397 has the second displacement member 397 as shown in FIGS. Of the one side wall 397e (the side surface connecting the first corner portion 397b and the second corner portion 397c), the portion on the first corner portion 397b side abuts on the leaf spring 393 (side surface of the protruding portion), and the leaf spring 393 is elastically deformed.

  In this case, the second displacement member 397 is elastically deformed because the second corner 397c (the first side wall 397e on the second corner 397c side) is in contact with the contact surface 396g3 of the first displacement member 396. In response to the elastic recovery force of the plate spring 393, the second displacement member 397 is restricted from rotating about the shaft support hole 397a (the shaft portion 396h). That is, the amount of overhang that the tip of the first corner 397b projects to the radially inward side of the first displacement member 396 (main body 396a) is not changed.

  Therefore, when the displacement unit 395 is displaced to the end interlocking position, the first corner 397b presses the side surface of the protruding portion of the leaf spring 393, so that the leaf spring 393 is elastically deformed to the opposite side of the displacement unit 395. As shown in FIG. 37 (d), when the first corner 397b gets over the protruding portion (protruding tip) of the leaf spring 393, the elastic deformation of the leaf spring 393 is recovered (the leaf spring 393 is in an unloaded state). Will be restored to the shape at). The elastic deformation amount of the leaf spring 393 is maximized when the first corner portion 397b of the second displacement member 397 gets over the protruding portion (protruding tip) of the leaf spring 393.

  In this case, with the elastic deformation of the leaf spring 393, the protrusion 393a is separated from the inner surface of the recess 392m of the base plate 392a, and when the elastic deformation of the leaf spring 393 is recovered, the protrusion 393a contacts the inner surface of the recess 392m ( Clash). Thereby, when the operation unit 320 (displacement unit 395) is displaced to the terminal position (terminal interlocking position), it is possible to generate an impact due to contact (collision) between the protrusion 393a and the concave portion 392m. As a result, vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand operating (gripping) the operation unit 320 (gripping unit 330), and the player can easily recognize that the operation unit 320 has been displaced to the end position.

  In addition, since the vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand when the operation unit 320 is operated to the end position, the operational feeling can be improved.

  Similarly, the first corner 397b of the second displacement member 397 gets over the protruding portion (protruding tip) of the leaf spring 393, so that the player who operates the operation unit 320 before and after the overcoming operation receives from the leaf spring 393. The reaction force (elastic recovery force) can be reversed. That is, the reaction force from the leaf spring 393 is gradually increased until the first corner 397b reaches the projecting tip (top) of the projecting portion of the leaf spring 393, and the maximum reaction force is generated when getting over. On the other hand, the reaction force can be drastically reduced immediately after getting over. Thereby, when operating the operation unit 320, a click feeling can be formed and an operation feeling can be improved. In particular, when this click feeling is formed, the vibration caused by the collision of the projection 393a with the concave portion 392m can be transmitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (d), when the displacement unit 395 is displaced from the end interlocking position to the initial biasing position, the second side wall 397f (first corner portion) of the second displacement member 397 is obtained. 397b and the third corner portion 397d) are in contact with the side surface of the protruding portion of the leaf spring 393.

  In this case, as the displacement unit 395 is displaced toward the initial biasing position, the second displacement member 397 causes the second corner 397c (the first side wall 397e on the second corner 397c side) to move to the first. It is rotated in the rotational direction (counterclockwise in FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (c)) to be separated from the contact surface 396g3 of the displacement member 396. As a result, the first corner 397 b of the second displacement member 397 is retracted in the direction away from the leaf spring 393. As a result, the leaf spring 393 is hardly elastically deformed. Therefore, the displacement unit 395 (operation unit 320) can be smoothly returned to the initial urging position (initial position).

  When the displacement unit 395 reaches the initial biasing position, as shown in FIGS. 38C and 38D, the first corner portion 397b passes through the protruding portion (bending tip) of the leaf spring 393. After that, the portion on the third corner 397d side of the second side wall 397f (side surface connecting the first corner 397b and the third corner 397d) of the second displacement member 397 is the restriction piece 392f (projection 392f1). ). As a result, the second displacement member 397 rotates the second corner 397c (the first side wall 397e on the second corner 397c side) in contact with the contact surface 396g3 of the first displacement member 396 (FIG. 38D). The first corner 397b is advanced (protruded) in the direction approaching the leaf spring 393. That is, the second displacement member 397 can be returned to the initial position. As a result, as described above, it is possible to reliably form a vibration transmission and a click feeling when the displacement unit 395 is displaced from the initial biasing position toward the terminal interlock position.

  The displacement (return) of the displacement unit 395 from the end interlocking position to the initial biasing position is performed by the elastic recovery force of the coil spring SP2, and therefore when the initial biasing position is reached, the second displacement member 397 ( The second side wall 397f) is brought into contact (collision) with the restricting piece 392f (convex portion 392f1). As described above, in this embodiment, the target to be brought into contact (collision) with the second displacement member 397 (second side wall 397f) is the restriction piece 392f (convex portion 392f1). 392f1) can be elastically deformed to reduce the impact at the time of contact (collision). As a result, it is possible to suppress damage (bending or breakage) of the shaft portion 396h that pivotally supports the second displacement member 397.

  Next, the displacement unit 2395 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. Although the case where the displacement unit 395 is rotationally displaced has been described in the first embodiment, the case where the displacement unit 2395 is linearly displaced will be described in the second embodiment. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  39 (a) to 39 (c) are front views of the base unit 2390 in the second embodiment, and FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c) are XLa-XLa lines in FIG. 39 (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the base unit 2390 in FIG.

  39A shows a state in which the operation unit 320 (see FIG. 16A) is disposed at the initial position and the displacement unit 2395 is disposed at the initial biasing position, and FIG. FIG. 39B shows a state where the operation unit 320 is arranged at the end position and the displacement unit 2395 is arranged at the end interlocking position. In FIG. 39B, the operation unit 320 is displaced from the initial position, and the operation unit 320 is engaged. The state where the piece 342b is disposed at the contact position where the piece 342b contacts the displacement unit 2395 (projecting portion 396b) is illustrated. 39 and 40, only the outer shape of the engaging piece 342b of the operation unit 320 is shown by a chain line. Further, FIG. 40 (a) shows the corresponding states in FIG. 39 (a), FIG. 40 (b) in FIG. 39 (b), and FIG. 40 (c) in FIG. 39 (c).

  As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the base unit 2390 in the second embodiment is provided with a base unit 2391, a displacement unit 2395 disposed in the base unit 2391, and a displacement unit 2395 with respect to the base unit 2391. The coil spring SP2 is mainly provided.

  The base unit 2391 includes a base member 2392 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the annular member 310 (see FIG. 15) of the displacement unit 300, and a leaf spring disposed on the base member 2392. 393 and a detection device 394 disposed on the base member 2392 are mainly provided.

  The base member 2392 includes a base plate 2392a, a first wall portion 392b which is erected from the base plate 2392a toward the front side (arrow F direction side) and has a semicircular arc shape in front view, and the first wall portion. A second wall portion 2392c erected on the radially outer side of the first wall portion 392b with respect to 392b, a third wall portion 2392h erected from the base plate 2392a toward the front side, and a front side from the base plate 2392a. A spring engaging piece 2392k and an inner first engaging piece 2392d1 projecting toward the front, and a regulating piece 2392f formed on the inner side of the base plate 2392a cut out in a substantially U shape when viewed from the front. Prepare for.

  The base plate 2392a in the second embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape that is vertically long when viewed from the front. In addition, the annular member 310 on which the base member 2392 is disposed is formed such that the inner peripheral shape thereof is larger than the outer shape (outer peripheral shape) of the base plate 2392a.

  The second wall portion 2392c is a wall portion that guides the displacement of the displacement unit 2395, which will be described later. The second wall portion 2392c is formed at a position adjacent to the displacement unit 2395 in the front view, and is linear along the displacement locus of the displacement unit 2395. It is extended.

  Further, an outer first engagement piece 2392e1 and an outer second engagement piece 2392e2 project from the standing end (front side) toward the displacement unit 2395 on the second wall 2392c. These outer first engagement piece 2392e1 and outer second engagement piece 2392e2 are parts that regulate the dropout of the displacement unit 2395 disposed in the base unit 2391 to the front side (in the direction of arrow F), respectively. It is formed at a position separated by a predetermined distance along the extending direction of the second wall portion 2392c (the displacement direction of the displacement unit 2395).

  The outer first engagement piece 2392e1 and the outer second engagement piece 2392e2 are parts that regulate the dropout of the displacement unit 2395 disposed in the base unit 2391 to the front side (in the direction of arrow F). The displacement unit 2395 (first displacement member 2396) disposed at 2391 is formed at a position separated from the base plate 2392a by the thickness in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Thereby, the displacement unit 2395 (first displacement member 2396) can be disposed in a state of being sandwiched between the base plate 2392a and the outer first engagement piece 2392e1 and the outer second engagement piece 2392e2 (FIG. 40A). )reference).

  The third wall portion 2392h is formed along the edge portion of the base plate 2392a, and the upper side (upper side in FIG. 39) is curved in a semicircular shape coaxial with the first wall portion 392b. The second cylindrical portion 362b (not shown) of the second annular member 362 to which the base unit 2390 is fastened has an outer shape in the rear view that is the same shape as the outer shape of the third wall portion 2392h. Thereby, when the base unit 2390 is fastened to the operation unit 320, the back side of the second cylindrical portion 362b and the third wall portion 2392h are brought into contact with each other, so that the inside of the second cylindrical portion 362b It is possible to suppress an unauthorized member from being inserted into the screen.

  The spring engagement piece 2392k is a portion that engages one end of the coil spring SP2 that urges the displacement unit 2395, protrudes from the front side of the base plate 2392a, and moves toward the opposite side to the displacement direction of the displacement unit 2395. It is formed in an L shape in side view with its tip bent.

  The inner first engagement piece 2392d1 is a member that prevents the displacement unit 2395 from dropping (removing) toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F), and is located at a position along the displacement locus of the displacement unit 2395 (a position overlapping in front view). It is formed. The inner first engagement piece 2392d1 includes a first portion (standing portion) erected from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 2392a, and a second wall from the projecting tip of the first portion. And a second portion (protruding portion) located on the displacement locus of the displacement unit 2395 (a position overlapping the displacement locus in front view). Thus, the displacement unit 2395 disposed on the front surface of the base plate 2392a can be disposed in a state of being sandwiched between the base plate 2392a and the second portion (projecting portion) of the inner first engagement piece 2392d1 ( FIG. 40 (a)).

  The restriction piece 2392f is a part that restricts displacement of the displacement unit 2395 to one side (initial biasing position side), and is formed on the back side of the displacement unit 2395 disposed along the second wall portion 2392c. It is formed at a position overlapping the displacement locus of the displacement unit 2395 in front view.

  The restriction piece 2392f is formed by cutting out the base plate 2392a in a substantially U shape when viewed from the front, and is formed as an elastic piece having one end connected to the base plate 2392a and the other end being a free end. The other end side of the restriction piece 2392f is provided with a convex portion 392f1 protruding toward the front side (displacement unit 2395 side, arrow F direction side), and the displacement unit 2395 is brought into contact with the convex portion 392f1. Thus, the displacement of the displacement unit 2395 to one side is restricted.

  The displacement unit 2395 is mainly composed of a first displacement member 2396 that is formed in a straight line shape (substantially rectangular shape in front view) as viewed from the front, and a second displacement member 397 that is pivotally supported by the first displacement member 2396. Prepare for.

  The first displacement member 2396 includes a body portion 2396a that extends linearly, a spring engagement portion 396c that is formed in a substantially C-shape in front view at one end in the longitudinal direction of the body portion 2396a, and a body portion 2396a. A projecting portion 396b projecting from the side surface on the other end side in the longitudinal direction toward the first wall portion 392b of the base plate 2392a, and a projection projecting from the side surface opposite to the second wall portion 2392c of the main body portion 2396a. Detection that protrudes from the side surface of the second wall portion 2392c side of the main body portion 2396a, the outer recessed portion 2396e formed by cutting out the edge portion of the main body portion 2396a side of the second wall portion 2392c side. It mainly includes a piece 396f and a shaft portion 396h that protrudes from the back surface of the main body portion 2396a and is formed in a columnar shape.

  The main body 2396a is set to have a length in the longitudinal direction (a direction extending in a straight line shape) shorter than the extended dimension of the second wall 2392c. The displacement amount of the displacement unit 2395 is set to a dimension (displacement amount) smaller than the difference between the extension dimension of the second wall portion 2392c and the longitudinal length of the main body portion 2396a. Thus, when the first displacement member 2396 (displacement unit 2395) is displaced along the second wall portion 2392c, the main body portion 2396a can always be disposed at a position adjacent to the second wall portion 2392c.

  The main body 2396a includes a first surface 396a1 that forms the back surface on the other end side in the longitudinal direction, and a second surface 396a2 that is positioned on the front side of the first surface 396a1 and forms the back surface on the one end side in the longitudinal direction. And a wall surface 396g connecting the first surface 396a1 and the second surface 396a2 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

  In the second embodiment, the spring engagement piece 2392k of the base plate 2392a with which the coil spring SP2 is engaged is formed on the extension line of the displacement locus of the displacement unit 2395. The coil spring SP2 is engaged with the spring engagement piece 2392k at a position along the displacement direction of the displacement unit 2395 (longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 2396), and is disposed in an elastically deformed state. Is done. Therefore, the coil spring SP2 can apply an urging force (elastic recovery force) in a direction toward the initial urging position to the displacement unit 2395.

  The engaging portion 2396d has a thickness dimension in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) set to be smaller than the thickness dimension of the main body portion 2396a, and is formed at a position continuous with the back surface of the main body portion 2396a. That is, the front surface of the engaging portion 2396d is located on the back side of the front surface of the main body portion 2396a.

  In addition, the engaging portion 2396d includes the base plate 2392a and the second portion of the inner first engaging piece 2392d1 (protruding) in a state where the first displacement member 2396 is disposed on the base member 2392 (base unit 2391). It is a part arrange | positioned between facing opposition. Accordingly, the protrusion distance (first portion) of the inner first engagement piece 2392d1 from the base plate 2392a is set to the extent that the thickness dimension of the engagement portion 2396d is set to be smaller (thinner) than the thickness dimension of the main body portion 2396a. (Erecting height of (standing part)) can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to secure the rigidity of the inner first engagement piece 2392d1 and to prevent the inner first engagement piece 2392d1 from being damaged by the reaction force applied from the first displacement member 2396 (displacement unit 2395).

  The engaging portion 2396d includes an inner first recessed portion 2396d1 formed by partially notching the outer edge along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 2396a. The inner first recessed portion 2396d1 engages with the second portion (projecting portion) of the inner first engagement piece 2392d1 when the first displacement member 2396 is disposed on the base member 2392 (base unit 2391). 2396d is a notch that is inserted through the front side of the inner first engagement piece 2392d1, and is formed with an inner edge shape that is larger than the shape of the bent portion of the inner first engagement piece 2392d1.

  The outer recessed portion 2396e allows the outer second engagement piece 2392e2 to be inserted into the front side of the main body portion 2396a of the first displacement member 2396 when the first displacement member 2396 is disposed on the base member 2392 (base unit 2391). A notch is formed in the outer edge along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 2396a opposite to the inner first recessed portion 2396d1, with an inner edge shape larger than the shape of the outer second engagement piece 2392e2 in front view. .

  The separation distance between the outer recessed portion 2396e and the inner first recessed portion 2396d1 in the extending direction (longitudinal direction) of the main body portion 2396a is equal to the outer second engaging piece 2392e2 in the displacement direction of the displacement unit 2395, and The inner first engagement piece 2392d1 is set to be substantially the same as the separation distance.

  Thus, as in the case of the first embodiment, the inner first engaging piece 2392d1 and the outer second engaging piece 392e2 of the base member 2392 are replaced with the inner first recessed portion 2396d1 of the first displacement member 2396, And the 1st displacement member 2396 (displacement unit 2395) can be arrange | positioned by the base member 2392 (base part unit 2391) by each inserting in the outer side recessed part 396e.

  In the base unit 2390, as shown in FIGS. 39A and 40A, the front end of the engagement piece 342b of the operation unit 320 (see FIG. 15) protrudes from the main body 2396a of the first displacement member 2396. When the operation unit 320 is disposed at the initial position, the projecting portion 396b and the tip of the engagement piece 342b are disposed at a predetermined interval.

  When the operation unit 320 (see FIG. 15) is operated by the player from the initial position and the engagement piece 342b of the operation unit 320 is rotated (displaced), as shown in FIGS. 39 (b) and 40 (b). In addition, the engaging piece 342 b comes into contact with the protruding portion 396 b of the displacement unit 2395.

  In the second embodiment, as in the case of the first embodiment, the position where the engagement piece 342b abuts on the projecting portion 396b is displaced between the initial position and the first position. It is considered as a position. As a result, when the player pushes the operation unit 320 from the initial position, the guided member 344 is engaged before contacting the fourth guide surface 351d (see FIG. 26B) of the second guide region. The piece 342b can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 396b.

  Therefore, before the guided member 344 reaches the first position (the guided member 344 reaches the fourth guide surface 351d), a resistance force (biasing force of the coil spring SP2) that opposes the pushing direction of the gripping unit 330 is applied. be able to. As a result, the impact when the guided member 344 comes into contact with the fourth guide surface 351d can be suppressed, and damage to the guided member 344 and the fourth guide surface 351d can be suppressed.

  When the operation unit 320 is displaced from the contact position to the end position (that is, the operation unit 320 is further rotationally displaced from the position where the engagement piece 342b contacts the protruding portion 396b), FIG. 39 (c) and FIG. As shown in 40 (c), the displacement unit 2395 (first displacement member 2396) is linearly displaced (linearly moved) along the longitudinal direction in accordance with the displacement of the engagement piece 342 b. As a result, the displacement unit 2395 is disposed at the displacement end position.

  In this case, as in the case of the first embodiment, after the engagement piece 342b comes into contact with the protruding portion 396b, the engagement piece 342b is moved to the end position while the operation unit 320 is displaced to the end position. Is displaced in the same direction. That is, since the contact between the engagement piece 342b and the protruding portion 396b is maintained, the urging force (elastic recovery force) of the coil spring SP2 can continue to act as an operational feeling when operating the operation unit 320. it can.

  On the displacement locus of the second displacement member 397 of the displacement unit 2395, a leaf spring 393 disposed on the base unit 2391 is disposed. Therefore, when the displacement unit 2395 is displaced from the initial biasing position to the end interlocking position, the displacement unit 2395 is in the middle of the displacement (just before reaching the end interlocking position, as in the first embodiment). The second displacement member 397 can contact the leaf spring 393 and elastically deform the leaf spring 393. The elastic deformation of the leaf spring 393 accompanying the displacement of the displacement unit 2395 is the same as in the case of the first embodiment, and a description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, the displacement unit 2395 is biased toward the initial bias position by the biasing force (elastic recovery force) of the coil spring SP2. Therefore, when the operation of the operation unit 320 is released (for example, when the player releases his / her hand from the gripping unit 330), the displacement unit 2395 is displaced toward the initial biasing position. The engagement piece 342b is pushed back by the protruding portion 396b of the unit 395, and as a result, the operation unit 320 is returned to the initial position.

  Thus, in the second embodiment, the engagement piece 342b of the operation unit 320 to be rotationally displaced is brought into contact with the first displacement member 2396 (displacement unit 2395) that is linearly displaced (linearly moved), Since the first displacement member 2396 is displaced (the engagement piece 342b slides on the projecting portion 396b), the displacement is displaced with respect to the circumferential displacement distance of the engagement piece 342b when the operation unit 320 is displaced. The displacement distance of the unit 2395 in the linear direction can be reduced. Thereby, when displacing the displacement unit 2395, the force required to operate the operation unit 320 can be reduced. As a result, the player can easily operate the operation unit 320. In addition, since a space necessary for disposing the displacement unit 2395 can be reduced, the base unit 2390 can be downsized.

  In addition, the contact surface with which the engagement piece 342b contacts with the protruding portion 396b is formed as a flat surface that is linear in a front view, and in the front view, the displacement direction of the displacement unit 2395 (the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 2396). Direction). The inclination direction of the contact surface of the projecting portion 396b is inclined in a direction away from the engagement piece 342b toward the projecting distal end side (opposite side of the main body portion 396a) of the projecting portion 396b. Further, the side surface of the engaging piece 342b that contacts the protruding portion 396b is formed to be curved in an arc shape that is convex toward the protruding portion 396b in a front view. Thus, even when the engaging piece 342b is displaced in the rotational direction and the protruding portion 396b is displaced in the linear direction, the engaging piece 432b can be easily slid with respect to the protruding portion 396b. Can be stabilized.

  Here, in the second embodiment, in a state where the operation unit 320 (displacement unit 2395) is disposed at the terminal position (terminal interlocking position), the engaging piece 342b contacts the projecting portion 396b, and the operation unit 320 (engagement unit) is engaged. The direction connecting the center of rotation of the joint piece 342b) and the engagement piece 342b is parallel to the direction of linear displacement (linear movement) of the displacement unit 2395 in a front view, and the engagement piece 342b of the projecting portion 396b is You may comprise so that the surface contact | abutted may be orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement (linear motion) of the displacement unit 2395 in front view. That is, you may comprise in the positional relationship to which the rotation direction of the engagement piece 342b and the direction of the linear displacement of the displacement unit 2395 orthogonally cross. According to this, the player is set by setting the second guide surface 351b (see FIG. 22D) of the guide unit 350 in a direction orthogonal to the pushing direction (arrow FB direction) of the operation unit 320. Thus, after the operation unit 320 is rotationally displaced to the end position, the operation unit 320 can be maintained at the end position. That is, it is possible to suppress the operation unit 320 from returning to the initial position by the urging force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 14) and the coil spring SP2. As a result, variations in the operation method of the operation unit 320 can be provided to improve the interest of the player.

  Next, a base unit 3390 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the inner first engaging piece 392d1 of the base member 392, the inner first engaging piece 392d1, the inner second engaging portion 396d2, the inner second recessed portion 396d2, and the outer recessed portion 396e of the first displacement member 396 are arranged. At a position (phase) where the two engagement pieces 392d2 and the outer second engagement piece 392e2 can be inserted, the displacement unit 395 is moved backward with respect to the base member 392 (arrow B direction) while elastically deforming the restriction piece 392f. The case where the displacement unit 395 is disposed on the base unit 391 by rotating the displacement unit 395 (sliding displacement along the second wall portion 392c) after being pushed in has been described. In the third embodiment, the displacement unit 395 is disposed. It is only necessary to push 3395 into the back side (in the direction of arrow B) with respect to the base member 3392 (that is, the inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3). 92d4 and outer first locking portion 3392E3, in the outer second locking portion 3392e4 only to elastic deformation), the displacement unit 3395 is disposed in the base unit 3391. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  41A is a front view of the base unit 3390 according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 41B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the base unit 3390 taken along the line XLIb-XLIb in FIG. 41 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the base unit 3390 taken along the line XLIc-XLIc in FIG. 41 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 41, a base unit 3390 in the third embodiment includes a base unit 3391, a displacement unit 3395 disposed in the base unit 3391, and a coil that biases the displacement unit 3395 against the base unit 3391. Spring SP2 is mainly provided.

  The base unit 3391 is formed in an outer shape corresponding to the inner peripheral shape of the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the annular member 310 (see FIG. 15) of the displacement unit 300, and is disposed inside the annular member 310. It mainly includes a base member 3392, a leaf spring 393 disposed on the base member 3392, and a detection device 394 disposed on the base member 3392.

  The base member 3392 includes a base plate 3392a, a first wall portion 392b erected in a semicircular shape toward the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 3392a, and the center of the first wall portion 392b. A second wall portion 3392c, a first wall portion 392b and a second wall portion 392c which are formed in a coaxial semicircular arc shape and are erected from the base plate 3392a toward the front side. A third wall portion 392h that is erected from the base plate 3392a toward the front side, a spring engagement piece 392k that protrudes from the base plate 3392a toward the front side, and an inner first locking portion 3392d3. The inner second engaging portion 3392d4 and the convex portion 3392f1 and the restriction piece 392f are mainly provided.

  The second wall portion 3392c is set to a diameter larger than the diameter of the first wall portion 392b, and is formed at a position that is separated from the first wall portion 392b by a predetermined distance. The second wall portion 3392c is a wall portion that guides the displacement of a first displacement member 3396 (displacement unit 3395), which will be described later, and is curved in an arc shape having a diameter along the displacement locus of the first displacement member 3396 (displacement unit 3395). Formed.

  The second wall portion 3392c includes a plurality of cutout portions 3392c2 that are formed in a slit shape with a predetermined depth (cutout dimension) from the standing tip side toward the base plate 3392a side. In the present embodiment, the notch portion 3392c2 has a pair of notch portions 3392c2 that are separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the circumferential direction along the second wall portion 3392c.

  The pair of notches 3392c2 are notched from the radially inner side to the radially outer side of the second wall portion 3392c. That is, each notch portion 3392c2 is formed so as to penetrate the second wall portion 3392c in the plate thickness direction (radial direction).

  The pair of cutout portions 3392c2 has a cutout dimension (depth) to the base plate 3392a side (arrow B direction side) set to be smaller than the standing dimension of the second wall portion 3392c from the base plate 3392a. That is, each notch portion 3392c2 does not reach the proximal end of the second wall portion 3392c, and the second wall portion 3392c has a state in which the proximal end side is continuous along the circumferential direction (the displacement direction of the displacement unit 3395). (Continuously formed).

  The second wall portion 3392c has an outer first engagement from the inner peripheral surface of the second wall portion 3392c located between the pair of cutout portions 3392c2 toward the radially inner side (displacement unit 3395 side) of the second wall portion 3392c. A stopping portion 3392e3 and an outer second locking portion 3392e4 are provided to project.

  The outer first locking portion 3392e3 and the outer second locking portion 3392e4 allow the displacement unit 3395 to be detached (removed) while allowing the displacement unit 3395 to be described later to be attached to a base member 3392 (base unit 3391). It is a protrusion to be controlled, and protrudes to a position overlapping the displacement locus of the displacement unit 3395 in the front view.

  The outer first locking portion 3392e3 and the outer second locking portion 3392e4 are inclined downward toward the back surface (arrow B direction side) as the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) moves away from the second wall portion 3392c. On the other hand, the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) is formed in a plane parallel to the front surface of the base plate 3392a.

  The opposing distance (the dimension in the direction of the arrow FB) between the back surface of the outer first locking portion 3392e3 and the outer second locking portion 3392e4 and the front surface of the base plate 3392a is a displacement unit 3395 (first displacement member 3396). ) In the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). Accordingly, the displacement unit 3395 can be disposed so as to be displaceable in a state of being sandwiched between the front surface of the base plate 3392a and the back surface of the outer first locking portion 3392e3 and the outer second locking portion 3392e4 (see FIG. 41 (c)).

  The inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4 are members that restrict the displacement unit 3395 from dropping (removing) while allowing the displacement unit 3395 to be attached to the base member 3392 (base unit 3391). Yes, and is erected from the front surface of the base plate 3392a in the same direction as the second wall portion 3392c (arrow F direction).

  A claw portion projects from the inner peripheral surface of the inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4 toward the second wall portion 3392c side. The claw portion (the portion projecting from the inner peripheral surface at the standing tip to the second wall portion 3392c side) is projected to a position overlapping the displacement locus of the displacement unit 3395 in the front view.

  The inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4 are arranged so that the front surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the claw portion (projecting portion) is on the second wall portion 3392c side (projecting projection of the claw portion). On the other hand, it is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back side (arrow B direction side) toward the front end in the direction, while the back surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) is formed in a plane parallel to the front surface of the base plate 3392a.

  The facing interval (dimension in the direction of arrow FB) between the back surface of the claw portion (projecting portion) of the inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4 and the front surface of the base plate 3392a is a displacement unit 3395. The thickness dimension is set to be approximately the same as or slightly larger than the thickness dimension in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) of the (engagement portion 396d of the first displacement member 3396). Thus, the displacement unit 3395 (the engaging portion 396d of the first displacement member 3396) is placed between the front surface of the base plate 3392a and the back surface of the outer first locking portion 3392e3 and the outer second locking portion 3392e4. It can arrange | position so that a displacement is possible in the state pinched | interposed (refer FIG.41 (c)).

  The base member 3392 (base plate 3392a) is formed of a resin material, and includes an outer first locking portion 3392e3, an outer second locking portion 3392e4, an inner first locking portion 3392d3, and an inner second locking portion. 3392d4 can be elastically deformed.

  The plate thickness (the dimension in the left-right direction in FIG. 41 (c)) of the standing portion (the portion standing from the base plate 3392a) of the inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4 is the base plate 3392a. It is formed smaller than the plate thickness (dimension in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction)). Accordingly, the inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4 can be easily elastically deformed in a direction in which the claw portion approaches or moves away from the displacement unit 3395.

  The radial thickness of the second wall portion 3392c of the inner portion of the pair of cutout portions 3392c2 (the portion where the outer first locking portion 3392e3 and the outer second locking portion 3392e4 are formed) (FIG. 41 ( c) The dimension in the left-right direction) may be set to a dimension smaller than the plate thickness (the dimension in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction)) of the base plate 3392a. Accordingly, the second wall portion 3392c in the inner portion of the pair of notches 3392c2 can be easily elastically deformed in a direction in which the outer first locking portion 3392e3 and the outer second locking portion 3392e4 are close to or away from the displacement unit 3395. .

  The convex portion 3392f1 is formed at a position adjacent to the second displacement member 397 of the displacement unit 3395 disposed at the initial biasing position in a front view, and the second portion 3395f1 is the second when the displacement unit 3395 is disposed at the initial biasing position. By abutting against the displacement member 397, the second displacement member 397 functions as a part that defines the arrangement of the second displacement member 397 with respect to the first displacement member 3396. That is, the convex portion 3392f1 is arranged at the same position as the convex portion 392f1 of the 392f in the first embodiment, and the action (regulation of arrangement) on the second displacement member 397 at the initial biasing position is the same as that in the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the case of the form (convex portion 392f1), detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The displacement unit 3395 is biased toward the initial biasing position side by the coil spring SP2, and the second displacement member 397 abuts against the convex portion 3392f at the initial biasing position, so that the displacement unit 3395 is maintained at the initial biasing position. (The displacement unit 3395 is restrained from being displaced beyond the initial urging position).

  The displacement unit 3395 mainly includes a first displacement member 3396 and a second displacement member 397 that is rotatably supported by the first displacement member 3396.

  The first displacement member 3396 includes a main body 396a formed in an arcuate shape (a shape in which an annular shape is divided at two positions (positions whose phases are different by 180 degrees)) and a main body 396a. Spring engaging portion 396c formed in a substantially C shape at one end side in the longitudinal direction (circumferential direction) of the main body 396a and the arc center of the main body portion 396a at the other end side in the longitudinal direction (circumferential direction) of the main body portion 396a ) Projecting portion 396b projecting toward the outer periphery, engaging portion 3396d positioned along the inner edge of main body portion 396a and thinner than the other portions, and the outer peripheral edge of main body portion 396a An outer recessed portion 396e formed by cutting out the portion, a detection piece 396f projecting radially outward from an edge on the outer peripheral side of the main body portion 396a, and a cylindrical projection on the back surface of the main body portion 396a. Mainly provided with a shaft portion 396h That.

  The engaging portion 3396d has a thickness in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) set to a dimension smaller than the thickness in the front-rear direction of the main body portion 396a, and the back surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) is the main body portion 396a. It is formed so as to be connected to the back surface. That is, the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the engaging portion 396d is positioned so as to recede to the back surface side (the arrow B direction side) from the front surface of the main body portion 396a.

  When the first displacement member 3396 is disposed on the base member 3392 (base unit 3391), the engaging portion 3392d includes the front surface of the base plate 3392a, the inner first locking portion 3392d3, and the inner second locking portion 3392d4. It is arrange | positioned between opposition with the back surface of a nail | claw part. Therefore, since the thickness of the engaging portion 3396d is smaller (thin) than the thickness of the main body portion 3396a, the inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4 are separated from the base plate 3392a. The standing height can be lowered.

  As a result, it is possible to ensure the rigidity of the inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4. Therefore, the displacement unit 3395 can be prevented from dropping from the base member 3392 to the front side (arrow F direction side). Further, the inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4 are damaged (broken) by a load (impact) when receiving the displacement unit 3395 radially inward (rightward in FIG. 41 (c)). Can be suppressed. The displacement of the displacement unit 3395 in the radially outward direction can be received by the entire second wall portion 3392c, whereas the displacement of the displacement unit 3395 in the radially inward direction is caused by the inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner side. Since it is necessary to receive only by the second locking portion 3392d4, it is particularly effective to increase the rigidity of the inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4.

  Note that the displacement unit 3395 in the third embodiment is provided with a recessed portion (an inner first recessed portion 396d1, an inner second recessed portion d2, an outer recessed portion 396e) in the first displacement member 396 as in the first embodiment. ) Is formed in the same manner as the displacement unit 395 except that it is not recessed.

  The displacement unit 3395 is attached to the base unit 3390 (base unit 3391) by placing the displacement unit 3395 in front of the base unit 3391 and then pushing the displacement unit 3395 into the back side (base plate 3392a side).

  In this case, the back surface (surface formed by inclining) of the radially outer edge of the first displacement member 3396 is the outer first locking portion 3392e3 of the base member 3392 and the outer second locking portion 3392e4. The outer first locking portion 3392e3 and the outer second locking portion 3392e4 are pushed out to the outside in the radial direction of the second wall portion 3392c, and are in contact with the front surface, and the second wall portion 3392c (between the pair of notch portions 3392c2). Is elastically deformed radially outward.

  Similarly, the radially inner edge (engagement portion 3396d) of the first displacement member 3396 is formed in front of the claw portions of the inner first engagement portion 3392d3 and the inner second engagement portion 3392d4 of the base member 3392 (see FIG. The claw portions of the inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4 are pushed out inward in the radial direction of the second wall portion 3392c. The standing portions of the locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4 are elastically deformed.

  Thereafter, the radially outer edge of the first displacement member 3396 is the claw of the outer first locking portion 3392e3 and the outer second locking portion 3392e4, the inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4. The second wall portion 3392c (the portion between the pair of notch portions 3392c2) and the standing portion of the inner first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4 are elastically recovered, Return to the initial position (no load position). Thereby, the attachment of the displacement unit 3395 to the base unit 3391 is completed.

  As described above, according to the base unit 3390, when the displacement unit 3395 is disposed on the base unit 3391 as in the first embodiment, it is necessary to align the displacement unit 3395 with a specified position (positioning position). Instead, the displacement unit 3395 can be attached (arranged) to the base unit 3391 simply by pushing the displacement unit 3395 from the front side (arrow F direction side) to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the displacement region. Further, unlike the case of the first embodiment, it is not necessary to slide the displacement unit 3395 (rotate along the displacement trajectory) after being pushed toward the back side (arrow B direction side). As a result, the operation (assembly work) when disposing the displacement unit 3395 in the base unit 3391 can be simplified.

  In the third embodiment, the displacement unit 3395 can be disposed from the front side in the displacement locus (the region through which the displacement unit 3395 passes from the initial biasing position to the terminal interlock position). Unlike the embodiment, it is not necessary to secure a space for disposing the displacement unit 395 outside the displacement region of the displacement unit 395 (in the first embodiment, a part of the displacement unit 395 protrudes outside the displacement region at the positioning position). Therefore, it is possible to easily secure an arrangement space for other components (for example, the coil spring SP2 or the detection device 394, or a rib for reinforcement).

  As described above, each notch portion 3392c2 does not reach the base end of the second wall portion 3392c, and the base end side of the second wall portion 3392c is continuous along the circumferential direction (the displacement direction of the displacement unit 3395). (Consecutively formed).

  Therefore, when the displacement unit 3395 (the first displacement member 3396) is displaced, the displacement can be received on the proximal end side of the second wall portion 3392c (the region where the notch portion 3392c2 is not formed). Therefore, the portion of the second wall portion 3392c where the outer first locking portion 3392e3 and the outer second locking portion 3392e4 project is broken (the portion located between the pair of notch portions 3392c2) is broken (broken). This can be suppressed.

  Further, the displacement unit 3395 (the first displacement member 3396) can be guided on the proximal end side of the second wall portion 3392c (the region where the notch portion 3392c2 is not formed) (the inner peripheral surface on the proximal end side continuous in the circumferential direction). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer edge of the first displacement member 3396 from being caught by the inner edge of the notch 3392c2 and being damaged or worn.

  Next, a base unit 4390 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the protrusion formed on the base plate 392a in the recessed portion (inner first recessed portion 396d1, etc.) recessed in the radially inner portion and the radially outer portion of the first displacement member 396. The case where the disposition unit (395, etc.) is inserted and the displacement unit 395 is disposed in the base unit 391 has been described. However, in the fourth embodiment, only one side of the first displacement member 4396 is disposed. A case where the recessed portion is formed will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Fig.42 (a) is a front view of the base unit 4390 in 4th Embodiment, FIG.42 (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the base unit 4390 in the XLIIb-XLIIb line | wire of Fig.42 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 42, a base unit 4390 in the fourth embodiment includes a base unit 4391, a displacement unit 4395 disposed in the base unit 4391, and a coil that biases the displacement unit 4395 relative to the base unit 4391. Spring SP2 is mainly provided.

  The base unit 4391 includes a base member 4392 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the annular member 310 (see FIG. 15) of the displacement unit 300, and a leaf spring disposed on the base member 4392. 393 and a detection device 394 disposed on the base member 4392 are mainly provided.

  The base member 4392 includes a base plate 2392a, a first wall portion 392b erected in a semicircular shape from the base plate 2392a toward the front side (arrow F direction side), and the first wall portion 392b. A second wall portion 2392c erected on the radially outer side of the first wall portion 392b, a third wall portion 2392h erected from the base plate toward the front side, and a projection protruding from the base plate 2392a toward the front side. A spring engagement piece 2392k, an inner first engagement piece 4392d1, and a regulation piece 2392f (see FIG. 40A) formed on the inner side of the base member 2392 cut out in a substantially U shape when viewed from the front. Is mainly provided.

  The inner first engagement piece 4392d1 is a member that prevents a displacement unit 4395, which will be described later, from dropping off (removing), and protrudes at a position along the displacement locus of the displacement unit 4395. Further, the inner first engagement piece 4392d1 protrudes from the base plate 2392a toward the front side, and the protruding tip is bent toward the second wall portion 2392c side.

  The inner first engagement piece 4392d1 has a distance between the bent portion and the base plate 2395a in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) of a displacement unit 4395 (an engagement portion 4396d of the first displacement member 4396) described later. It protrudes longer than the thickness dimension.

  The extending distance T6 of the bent portion of the inner first engaging piece 4392d1 toward the second wall 2392c is larger than the distance T7 between the bent portion of the inner first engaging piece 4392d1 and the base plate 2392a. It is set smaller (T7> T6).

  The second wall portion 4392 c is a wall portion that guides the displacement of the displacement unit 4395 described later, is formed at a position adjacent to the displacement unit 4395 in a front view, and extends along the displacement locus of the displacement unit 2395.

  The second wall portion 4392c includes a plurality of cutout portions 4392c2 formed by cutting out from the standing tip side toward the base plate 2392a. In the present embodiment, the notch portions 4392c2 are formed at two locations (four locations in total) in the extending direction, with a pair of notched portions 4392c2 separating a predetermined distance along the extending direction of the second wall portion 4392c.

  The pair of notches 4392c2 are notched in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the second wall 4392c. In addition, the pair of cutout portions 4392c2 is set such that a cutout dimension toward the base plate 2392a side (arrow B direction side) is smaller than a standing dimension of the second wall portion 4392c from the base plate 2392a. That is, the second wall portion 4392c is in a state where the base end side (base plate 2392a side) is continuous.

  Also, an outer first locking portion 4392e3 and an outer second locking portion projecting from the side surface on the displacement unit 4395 side of the second wall portion 4392c located between the pair of notch portions 4392c2 facing each other toward the displacement unit 4395 side. A portion 4392e4 is formed.

  The outer first locking portion 4392e3 and the outer second locking portion 4392e4 allow the displacement unit 4395 to be detached (removed) while allowing the displacement unit 4395 to be described later to be attached to a base member 4392 (base unit 4391). It is a protrusion to be controlled, and is provided at a position along the displacement locus of the displacement unit 4395.

  Further, the outer first locking portion 4392e3 and the outer second locking portion 4392e4 are inclined to the back side (arrow B direction side) as the front side (arrow F direction side) is separated from the second wall portion 4392c. Formed. On the other hand, the outer first locking portion 4392e3 and the outer second locking portion 4392e4 are formed on a plane whose back side is parallel to the front surface of the base plate 4392a.

  Furthermore, the back surfaces of the outer first locking portion 4392e3 and the outer second locking portion 4392e4 are formed at positions that are separated from the thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the displacement unit 4395 (first displacement member 4396). Accordingly, the displacement unit 4395 disposed on the front surface of the base plate 4392a is disposed between the base plate 4392a, the outer first locking portion 4392e3, and the outer second locking portion 4392e4. (See FIG. 42 (b)).

  The thickness of the second wall portion 4392c of the inner portion (the portion where the outer first locking portion 4392e3 and the outer second locking portion 4392e4 are formed) of the pair of notches 4392c2 is the plate of the base plate 2392a. It is formed smaller than the thickness (thickness in the front-rear direction of the base plate 2392a). Thereby, it is possible to easily elastically deform the second wall portion 4392c in the inner portion of the pair of cutout portions 4392c2 in the radial direction.

  The displacement unit 4395 mainly includes a first displacement member 4396 that is formed in a straight line when viewed from the front, and a second displacement member 397 that is pivotally supported by the first displacement member 4396.

  The first displacement member 4396 includes a body portion 2396a formed in a linear shape, a spring engagement portion 396c formed in a substantially C shape on one end side of the body portion 2396a extended in a straight line, and a linear shape. A projecting portion 396b projecting toward the center of the first wall portion 392b of the base plate 2392a on the other end side of the extended main body portion 2396a, and a second wall portion 2392c formed along the displacement unit 4395. Engaging portion 4396d projecting from the opposite side surface, detection piece 396f projecting from the second wall portion 2392c side surface of the main body portion 2396a, and projecting in a columnar shape on the back surface of the main body portion 2396a. And a shaft portion 396h.

  Since the engaging portion 4396d has a shape in which the inner first recessed portion 2396d1 is omitted from the engaging portion 2396d in the second embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The displacement unit 3395 is attached to the base unit 4391 of the base unit 4390 configured as described above. First, the engaging unit 4396d side of the displacement unit 4395 is brought close to the base plate 2392a, and the displacement unit 4395 is moved to the base plate. In an inclined state with respect to the front surface of 2392a, the engaging portion 4396d is pushed into the inside of the bent portion of the inner first engaging piece 4391d1.

  As described above, the inner first engagement piece 4391d1 has an extension distance T6 (see FIG. 42B) toward the second wall portion 2392c in the bent portion of the inner first engagement piece 4392d1. Since the distance T7 (see FIG. 42B) between the bent portion of the first engagement piece 4392d1 and the base plate 4391a is set to be smaller (shorter), the engagement portion 4396d is disposed obliquely. After being pushed inside the bent portion of the inner first engagement piece 4391d1, the displacement unit 4395 can be rotated toward the base plate 4392a around the engagement portion 4396d.

  Next, the displacement unit 4395 in a state of being disposed obliquely with respect to the front surface of the base plate 2392a is rotated around the engagement portion 4396d side as the axis, and the displacement unit 4395 is rotated toward the base plate 4392a side, so that it is opposite to the engagement portion 4396d. Is displaced to the base plate 4392a side.

  As a result, the edge of the first displacement member 4396 opposite to the engaging portion 4396d abuts on the outer first locking portion 4392e3 and the outer second locking portion 4392e4, and the outer first locking portion 4392e3. Then, the outer second engaging portion 4392e4 is pushed out toward the second wall portion 3392c, and the second wall portion 3392c is elastically deformed.

  Thereby, a space for displacing the side opposite to the engaging portion 4396d of the displacement unit 4395 to the base plate 4392a side can be secured, and the displacement unit 4395 can be attached to the base unit 3391.

  Further, as described above, the plate thickness in the front-rear direction of the main body portion 4396a is set to be smaller than the distance from the outer first locking portion 4392e3 and the outer second locking portion 4392e4 to the front surface of the base plate 2392a.

  Therefore, when the displacement unit 4395 is pushed to the front surface of the base plate 2392a, the contact of the outer first locking portion 3392e3, the outer second locking portion 3392e4, and the first displacement member 4396 is released, and the outer first engagement member. The elastic deformation of the stopping portion 3392e3 and the outer second locking portion 3392e4 is returned (released).

  According to the base unit 4390 configured as described above, one side (engagement portion 4396d side) of the displacement unit 4395 is engaged with the inside of the bent portion of the inner first engagement piece 4391d1, and the engagement side is engaged. The displacement unit 4395 can be disposed on the base unit 4391 by pushing the other side of the displacement unit 4395 toward the base plate 4392a as a fulcrum.

  Therefore, when the displacement unit 3395 is disposed on the base unit 4391 as in the third embodiment, the outer first locking portion 3392e3, the outer second locking portion 3392e4, and the inner side formed on both sides of the displacement unit 3395. There is no need to elastically displace the first locking portion 3392d3 and the inner second locking portion 3392d4, respectively. That is, it is not necessary to push in the respective locking portions 3392e3, 33992d3 and the like on both sides of the displacement unit 3395 while being elastically deformed uniformly. Accordingly, the disposition of the displacement unit 4395 to the base unit 4391 can be simplified.

  Further, since there is no need to elastically deform the inner first engagement piece 4391d, the rigidity of the inner first engagement piece 4391d is relatively high (compared to the inner first locking portion 4391d3 of the third embodiment). It is possible to prevent the inner first engagement piece 4391d from being deformed when the displacement unit 4395 is displaced.

  In particular, by adopting a configuration in which the inner first engagement piece 4391d is not elastically deformed, not only can the retention performance of the displacement unit 4395 (performance to prevent dropout) be improved, but also unauthorized members (for example, wire or (Piano wire) can be used to easily prevent the displacement unit 4395 from being removed illegally. In this case, the disposition position of the inner first engagement piece 4391d is made closer to the side where an unauthorized member is inserted than the disposition positions of the outer first engagement portion 4392e3 and the outer second engagement portion 4392e4. It is preferable.

  Next, a base unit 5390 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement unit 395 is displaced by the operation of the operation unit 320 by the player has been described. However, in the base unit 5390 of the fifth embodiment, the displacement unit 5395 is moved by the driving device 5398. The operation unit 320 is displaced by the displacement of the displacement unit 5395. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the configuration of the base unit 5390 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44. FIG. 43A is a front view of the base unit 5391 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 43B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the base unit 5391 taken along the line XLIIIb-XLIIIb in FIG. 44 (a) is a front view of the displacement unit 5395, FIG. 44 (b) is a rear view of the displacement unit 5395, and FIG. 44 (c) is a displacement of XLIVc-XLIVc in FIG. 44 (a). FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional view of unit 5395.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, a base unit 5390 in the fifth embodiment is provided with a base unit 5391, a displacement unit 5395 disposed in the base unit 5391, and a displacement unit 5395 attached to the base unit 5391. The coil spring SP2 (see FIG. 45 (a)) to be energized and a drive device 5398 (see FIG. 46 (a)) disposed on the back side of the base unit 5391 are mainly provided.

  The base unit 5391 is formed in an outer shape corresponding to the inner peripheral shape of the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the annular member 310 (see FIG. 15) of the displacement unit 300 described above, and is disposed inside the annular member 310. A base member 5392, a leaf spring 393 disposed on the base member 5392, and a detection device 394 disposed on the base member 392.

  The base member 5392 has a base plate 5392a, a first wall portion 392b which is formed in a semicircular shape on the base plate 5392a, and is erected toward the front side of the base plate 5392a (arrow F direction side), and the first wall portion 392b. A third wall portion formed in a semicircular shape coaxial with the center of the first wall portion 392b, formed in an annular shape coaxial with the first wall portion 392b, and erected from the base plate 392a toward the front side 392h, a spring engagement piece 392k projecting from the base plate 5392a toward the front side, and a convex portion 3392f1, and a radially outer side of the first wall portion 5392b and penetratingly formed in the base plate 5392a in a long hole shape And a sliding groove 5392a2.

  The insertion hole 5392a1 is a hole through which the shaft of the drive device 5398 (see FIG. 46A) disposed on the back side of the base unit 5391 is inserted, and is formed at a position corresponding to the drive device 5398. The driving device 5398 has a pinion 5398a attached to the shaft inserted through the insertion hole 5392a1, and drives the driving device 5398 by engaging the pinion 5398a with a tooth portion 5396k of a displacement unit 5395 described later. 5395 can be displaced.

  The sliding groove 5392a2 is a groove for guiding the displacement of a displacement unit 5395 described later, and a roller 5396j of the displacement unit 5395 is inserted therein. The sliding groove 5392a2 is formed in an arc shape coaxial with the first wall portion 392b.

  The displacement unit 5395 mainly includes a first displacement member 5396 that is formed in a substantially semicircular arc shape when viewed from the front, and a second displacement member 397 that is pivotally supported by the first displacement member 5396.

  The first displacement member 5396 includes a main body portion 396a formed in an arc shape, a spring engagement portion 396c formed in a substantially C shape in front view on one end side of the main body portion 396a extending in an arc shape, A plurality of protrusions 5396b projecting toward the center of the arc of the main body 396a on the other end side of the arc-shaped main body 396a, and a plurality of rows are provided along the outer edge of the main body 396a. A tooth portion 5396k, a detection piece 396f projecting radially outward from an outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 396a, a shaft portion 396h projecting in a columnar shape on the back surface of the main body portion 396a, Is mainly provided.

  In addition, the first surface 396a1 of the main body 396a has a rotating shaft portion 5396i protruding in a columnar shape from two places at different positions in the circumferential direction and a rotatable state around the rotating shaft portion 5396i. And a ring-shaped roller 5396j disposed in the above, and a flange portion 5396m projecting in a bowl shape from two places in the circumferential direction different from the rotating shaft portion 5396i toward the back side.

  The rotation shaft portion 5396i is a shaft that holds the roller 5396j, is set to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the roller 5396j, and is set to be longer in the axial direction than the roller 5396j. In addition, the rotation shaft portion 5396i has a hole in which a screw is screwed at the center. Thus, after the roller 5396j is disposed around the rotation shaft portion 5396i, the screw is screwed into the rotation shaft portion 5396i, so that the roller 5396j is disposed in a rotatable state on the rotation shaft portion 5396i.

  The roller 5396j is a portion disposed inside the sliding groove 5392a2 of the base plate 5392a as described above, and has an outer diameter smaller than the width dimension of the sliding groove 5392a2. In addition, each roller 5396j disposed in the two rotary shaft portions 5396i has an angle θ1 (see FIG. 44B) that is spaced circumferentially about the center of the arc of the main body portion 396a as a sliding groove. The angle θ2 (see FIG. 43A) extending in the circumferential direction about the center of the arc of 5392a2 is set. Thus, the two rollers 5396j can be displaced along the sliding groove 5392a2, and the difference between the angle θ1 and the angle θ2 and the displacement unit 5395 can be rotationally displaced.

  The protruding portion 5396b is formed on the displacement locus of the engaging piece 342b of the operation unit 320 (see FIG. 15). Further, the projecting portion 5396b is formed with an engagement hole 5396b1 penetrating in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

  The engagement hole 5396b1 is a hole into which the engagement piece 342b of the operation unit 320 is inserted. When the displacement unit 5395 is disposed at the initial biasing position, the engagement piece of the operation unit 320 disposed at the initial position. It is formed at a position corresponding to 342b (see FIG. 16B). Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, when the operation unit 320 and the base unit 5390 are assembled, the engagement piece 342b is inserted into the engagement hole 5396b1.

  The circumferential size of the engagement hole 5396b1 with the center of the main body 396a as the axis is set to be approximately the same as the size of the engagement piece 342b with the center of the main body 396a as the axis. Thereby, the displacement unit 5395 and the operation unit 320 can always be interlocked.

  There are a plurality of (11 in this embodiment) rows of tooth portions 5396k along the radially outer edge of the main body portion 396a from the other end of the main body portion 396a extending in an arc shape toward one end side. Established. The tooth portion 5396k is a portion that meshes with the pinion 5398a disposed on the shaft of the driving device 5398 disposed on the base unit 5391. Thereby, when the pinion 5398a rotates by driving of the driving device 5398, the displacement unit 5395 is displaced.

  The two flange portions 5396m protrude from the main body portion 396a in a state where the tips are bent in a substantially L shape. Further, the two flange portions 5396m are formed between two rotation shaft portions 5396i arranged at different positions in the circumferential direction around the center of the arc of the main body 396a, and from the center of the arc of the main body 396a. Projecting at different positions in the radial direction.

  Further, the two flange portions 5396m are bent in opposite directions in the radial direction from the center of the arc of the main body portion 396a, and one flange portion 5396m bent toward the inner side in the radial direction is the above-described sliding portion 5396m. The other flange portion 5396m that protrudes from a position along the inner diameter side edge of the moving groove 5392a2 and bends outward in the radial direction protrudes at a position along the outer diameter side edge of the sliding groove 5392a2. (See FIG. 46E).

  The flange portion 5396m is a member that engages with the base plate 5392a to prevent the displacement unit 5395 from dropping off to the front side. The bent portion at the tip of the flange portion 5396m is a base around the sliding groove 5392a2. The distance between the bent portion and the first surface 396a1 is set to be larger than the thickness of the base plate 5392a.

  Further, the flange portion 5396m is formed such that the protruding front end surface is inclined toward the front side toward the bent front end side. Accordingly, when the displacement unit 5395 is disposed on the base unit 5391, the flange portion 5396m in which the bent portion of the distal end overlaps the base plate 5392a around the sliding groove 5392a2 in the front-rear direction is provided as the protruding distal end surface of the flange portion 5396m. Can be elastically deformed to the inside of the sliding groove 5392a2. In addition, since the bent portion of the flange portion 5396m is disposed at a position beyond the back surface of the base plate 5392a, the elastic deformation of the flange portion 5396m is restored, and the bent portion at the tip of the flange portion 5396m is replaced with the base around the sliding groove 5392a2. The plate 5392a can be disposed at a position overlapping with the front-rear direction. That is, the flange portion 5396m allows the displacement unit 5935 to be disposed on the base unit 5391, and can prevent the displacement unit 5935 from dropping from the base unit 5391.

  Further, the two flange portions 5396m are set such that the distance between the outer sides in the opposing direction in the radial direction on the main body 396a side (base end side) is smaller than the outer diameter of the roller 5396j described above. Thereby, when the displacement unit 5395 is displaced with respect to the base plate 5392a, it is possible to suppress the flange portion 5396m disposed inside the sliding groove 5392a2 from being rubbed and damaged by the inner surface of the sliding groove 5392a2.

  According to the base unit 5390 configured as described above, the first displacement member 5396 (displacement unit 5395) configured as a rack is arranged on the base unit 5391 only by engaging the flange portion 5396m with the sliding groove 5392a2. Established. That is, an operation after disposing the displacement unit 5395 in the base unit 5391 (for example, an operation for fastening a screw) is not required. Therefore, the work of the operator who assembles the base unit 5390 can be simplified.

  In addition, the sliding groove 5392a2 can be provided with a role as a guide portion that guides the displacement of the displacement unit 5395 and a role as an engaged portion that engages the flange portion 5396m. Accordingly, it is not necessary to separately form the guide portion for guiding the displacement unit 5395 and the engaged portion for engaging the flange portion 5396m on the base plate 5392a, and other members are disposed on the base plate 5392a. It is easy to secure space.

  Further, as in the case of the first embodiment, the inner first engagement piece 392d1 and the outer first engagement piece 392e1 are provided on the base plate 392a, and the inner first engagement piece 392d1 and the outer first engagement piece 392e1. In the configuration in which the displacement unit 395 is engaged with the displacement unit 395 (the first displacement member 396), among the outer edges of the first displacement member 396, the inner first engagement piece 392d1 and the outer first engagement piece when the displacement unit 395 is displaced. A tooth portion 5396k cannot be provided in a portion facing (interfering) with 392e1.

  On the other hand, according to the fifth embodiment, since the flange portion 5396m is protruded from the back side of the first displacement member 5396 and the flange portion 5396m is engaged with the sliding groove 5392a2, the first displacement member 5396 is provided. It is possible to easily secure a region where the tooth portion 5396k can be disposed on the outer edge of the.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46, the displacement of the displacement unit 5395 in the fifth embodiment will be described. 45 (a) to 45 (c) are front views of the base unit 5390, and FIGS. 46 (a) to 46 (c) are views of the base unit 5390 along the XLVIa-XLVIa line of FIG. 45 (a). FIG. 46D is a cross-sectional view of the base unit 5390 taken along the line XLVId-XLVId in FIG. FIG. 46E is a cross-sectional view of the base unit 5390 taken along the line XLVIe-XLVIe of FIG.

  45 (a) to 45 (c) and FIGS. 46 (a) to 46 (c), the outer shape of the engagement piece 342b (see FIG. 16 (b)) of the operation unit 320 is indicated by a chain line. The 45 (a) and 46 (a) show the base unit 5390 in the state of being placed at the initial biasing position, and FIGS. 45 (c) and 46 (c) show the end interlocking position. 45 (b) and FIG. 46 (b) show the base unit 5390 in a state arranged at an intermediate position between the initial biasing position and the terminal interlocking position. Is done.

  45 and 46, the displacement unit 5395 is driven by the pinion 5398a rotated by the drive of the drive device 5398 via the tooth portion 5396k. In the fifth embodiment, the pinion 5398a is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, whereby the displacement unit 5395 is displaced from the initial biasing position to the end interlocking position. On the other hand, when the pinion 5398a is rotated clockwise in a front view, the displacement unit 5395 is displaced from the terminal interlock position to the initial biasing position side.

  In the initial urging position, the roller 5396j disposed on one end side of the main body 396a of the two rollers 5396j is disposed at a position adjacent to the end portion on one end side in the circumferential direction of the sliding groove 5392a2. . In addition, at the interlocking end position, the roller 5396j disposed on the other end side of the main body 396a of the two rollers 5396j is disposed at a position adjacent to the end portion on the other end side in the circumferential direction of the sliding groove 5392a2. The Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the displacement unit 5395 from being displaced beyond the initial biasing position or the end interlocking position.

  Further, the rotation angle from the initial biasing position of the displacement unit 5395 to the end interlocking position is set to be the same as the rotation angle of the operation unit 320 from the initial position to the end position. As described above, since the engagement piece 342b of the operation unit 320 disposed at the initial position is inserted into the engagement hole 5396b1 of the displacement unit 5395 disposed at the initial biasing position, the displacement unit 5395 reaches the terminal interlock position. When rotated, the operation unit 320 is rotated to the end position.

  Next, a base unit 6390 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the side of the restricting piece 392f connected to the base plate 392a is set in the direction in which the displacement unit 395 is biased by the coil spring SP2 has been described. The side connected to the base plate 6392a of the piece 6392f is set in a direction opposite to the direction in which the displacement unit 395 is urged by the coil spring SP2. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  47 (a) is a front view of the base unit 6391 in the sixth embodiment, FIG. 47 (b) is a front view of the base unit 6390, and FIG. 47 (c) is a view of FIG. 47 (b). It is a base unit 6390 cross-sectional model drawing in the XLVIIc-XLVIIc line.

  As shown in FIG. 47, a base unit 6390 in the sixth embodiment includes a base unit 6391, a displacement unit 395 disposed in the base unit 6391, and a coil that biases the displacement unit 395 against the base unit 391. Spring SP2 is mainly provided.

  The base unit 6391 is formed in an outer shape corresponding to the inner peripheral shape of the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the annular member 310 (see FIG. 15) of the displacement unit 300, and is disposed inside the annular member 310. It mainly includes a base member 392, a leaf spring 393 disposed on the base member 6392, and a detection device 394 disposed on the base member 392.

  The base member 6392 includes a base plate 6392a, a first wall portion 392b which is formed in a semicircular shape on the base plate 6392a, and is erected toward the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 392a. A second wall portion 392c, a first wall portion 392b, and a second wall portion 392c that are formed in a semicircular shape coaxial with the center of the first wall portion 392b and are erected from the base plate 392a toward the front side. A third wall portion 392h that is formed in an annular shape coaxially with the base plate 392a and stands up from the base plate 392a toward the front side, and a spring engagement piece 392k that projects from the base plate 392a toward the front side. It mainly includes an inner first engagement piece 392d1, an inner second engagement piece 392d2, and a restriction piece 6392f formed on the inner side of the base plate 392a cut out in a substantially U shape when viewed from the front.

  The restricting piece 6392f is a member that restricts displacement to one side of a displacement unit 395, which will be described later, and is formed between the first wall portion 392b and the second wall portion 392c in a front view. The restricting piece 6392f is formed at a position overlapping the displacement locus of the displacement unit 395 disposed between the first wall portion 392b and the second wall portion 392c.

  The restriction piece 6392f is formed by cutting out the base plate 6392a in a substantially U shape when viewed from the front, and one end connected to the base plate 6392a is in a direction in which the displacement unit 395 is urged by the coil spring SP2. Set in the opposite direction. Further, the restriction piece 6392f includes a convex portion 392f1 projecting toward the front side (displacement unit 395 side) at the other end, and the convex portion 392f1 is brought into contact with the displacement unit 395 so as to be on one side of the displacement unit 395. The displacement to can be regulated.

  According to the restriction piece 6392f in the sixth embodiment, when the displacement unit 395 is displaced from the end interlocking position side to the initial biasing position side, the second displacement member 397 is brought into contact with the convex portion 392f1 of the restriction piece 6392f. Thus, the displacement unit 395 can be maintained at the initial biasing position.

  Since the restriction piece 6392f has one end connected to the base plate 6392a set in a direction opposite to the direction in which the displacement unit 395 is urged by the coil spring SP2, the restriction unit 395 is displaced while being displaced toward the initial urging position. The force in contact with the piece 6392f can be applied as a force in a direction of pulling the restricting piece 6392f in the extending direction.

  Therefore, like the restricting piece 392f in the first embodiment, when the displacement unit 395 comes into contact, the restricting piece 6392f is elastically deformed to bend with its base side (connecting portion with the base plate 392a) as a fulcrum. Can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to reduce the load on the base side of the regulating piece 6392f and improve durability.

  Further, in the state where the convex portion 392f1 of the restriction piece 6392f is in contact with the second displacement member 397 and the displacement unit 395 is maintained at the initial biasing position, in the case of the first embodiment, the base side (base plate 392a) There is a risk that a wrinkle in a bent posture with the connecting portion) as a fulcrum may stick to the regulating piece 392f. When such a wrinkle is attached, the relative position of the restriction piece 392f (projection 392f1) with respect to the second displacement member 397 changes, and the second displacement member 397 cannot be brought into contact with the projection 392f1 of the restriction piece 6392f. Alternatively, the base portion of the restricting piece 6392f is more bent due to the contact. On the other hand, as in the sixth embodiment, the posture of the restriction piece 392f can be maintained in the initial posture by being deformed by pulling.

  When the displacement unit 395 is disposed on the base unit 6391, the restriction piece 6392f is elastically deformed to the back side in the same manner as the restriction piece 392f in the first embodiment, and the displacement unit 395 is disposed on the base unit 6391. it can. In this case, the position of the convex portion 392f1 with respect to the second displacement member 397 is the same as that in the first embodiment. Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, when the displacement unit 395 is disposed on the base unit 6391, the convex portion By using (contacting) the portion 3921f1, it is possible to suppress the second displacement member 397 from dropping out (from the shaft portion 396h).

  Next, a base unit 7390 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the second side wall 397f of the second displacement member 397 is formed on a flat surface has been described. However, in the seventh embodiment, the concave portion 7397f1 is formed on the second side wall 7397f of the second displacement member 7397. It is recessed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 48 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a base unit 7390 according to the seventh embodiment. 48 corresponds to a cross-sectional view of the base unit 390 in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the base unit 7390 in the seventh embodiment includes a base unit 391, a displacement unit 7395 disposed in the base unit 7391, and a coil that biases the displacement unit 395 against the base unit 391. Spring SP2 is mainly provided.

  The base unit 7391 is formed in an outer shape corresponding to the inner peripheral shape of the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the annular member 310 (see FIG. 15) of the displacement unit 300, and is disposed inside the annular member 310. It mainly includes a base member 7392, a leaf spring 393 disposed on the base member 7392, and a detection device 394 disposed on the base member 392.

  The base member 7392 includes a base plate 392a, a first wall portion 392b that is formed in a semicircular shape on the base plate 392a and is erected toward the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 392a. A second wall portion 392c, a first wall portion 392b, and a second wall portion 392c that are formed in a semicircular shape coaxial with the center of the first wall portion 392b and are erected from the base plate 392a toward the front side. A third wall portion 392h that is formed in an annular shape coaxially with the base plate 392a and stands up from the base plate 392a toward the front side, and a spring engagement piece 392k that projects from the base plate 392a toward the front side. It mainly includes an inner first engagement piece 392d1, an inner second engagement piece 392d2, and a restriction piece 7392f formed on the inner side of the base plate 392a cut out in a substantially U shape when viewed from the front.

  The restricting piece 7392f is a member that restricts displacement to one side of a displacement unit 395, which will be described later, and is formed between the first wall portion 392b and the second wall portion 392c in a front view. Further, the restricting piece 7392f is formed at a position overlapping the displacement locus of the displacement unit 395 disposed between the first wall portion 392b and the second wall portion 392c.

  The restriction piece 7392f is formed by cutting the base plate 392a into a substantially U shape when viewed from the front, and one end of the restriction piece 7392f is connected to the base plate 392a. Further, the restriction piece 7392f includes a convex portion 7392f1 projecting toward the front side (displacement unit 7395 side) at the other end, and the convex portion 7392f1 is brought into contact with the displacement unit 7395 so as to be on one side of the displacement unit 7395. The displacement to can be regulated.

  Further, the convex portion 7392f1 includes a second convex portion 7392f2 having a triangular cross section in which the contact surface with the displacement unit 7395 protrudes toward the contact surface (second side wall 7397f) of the displacement unit 7395. The second convex portion 7392f2 has a triangular cross-section formed over the entire contact surface of the convex portion 7391f with the displacement unit 7395 along the plane of the base plate 7392a.

  The displacement unit 7395 mainly includes a first displacement member 396 that is formed in a substantially semicircular arc shape when viewed from the front, and a second displacement member 7397 that is pivotally supported by the first displacement member 396.

  The first displacement member 396 includes a main body portion 396a formed in an arc shape, a spring engagement portion 396c formed in a substantially C shape in front view on one end side of the main body portion 396a extending in an arc shape, A projecting portion 396b projecting toward the center of the arc of the main body portion 396a and an engaging portion 396d projecting along the inner edge of the main body portion 396a are provided on the other end side of the main body portion 396a extending in an arc shape. An outer recessed portion 396e formed by cutting out the outer peripheral side edge of the main body 396a, a detection piece 396f projecting radially outward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 396a, The main part 396a mainly includes a shaft part 396h protruding in a columnar shape on the back surface of the main part 396a.

  Similar to the second displacement member 397 in the first embodiment, the entire second displacement member 7397 is formed in a substantially triangular shape in front view. The second displacement member 7397 includes a shaft support hole 397a penetrating in the front-rear direction. Note that the second displacement member 7397 is provided with three corners at the first corner portion 397b, the second corner portion 397c, and the third corner portion 397d, similarly to the second displacement member 397 in the first embodiment. This will be described with reference numerals.

  The second side wall 7397f, which is the side wall that connects the first corner 397b and the third corner 397d, abuts against the restriction piece 7392f of the base plate 7392a when the displacement unit 7395 is disposed at the initial biasing position. It is a surface, and the cross-sectional shape of the side surface includes a concave portion 7397f1 that is recessed in a triangular shape corresponding to the cross-sectional shape of the second convex portion 7392f2 of the regulating piece 7392f.

  Accordingly, when the displacement unit 7395 is disposed at the initial biasing position and the displacement unit 7395 is biased toward the regulating piece 7392f by the coil spring SP2, the second convex portion 7392f2 is inserted inside the concave portion 7397f1, The restriction piece 7392f and the second displacement member 7397 can be engaged with each other. Therefore, in a state where the displacement unit 7395 is disposed at the initial biasing position, the restricting piece 7392f is elastically deformed to the back side (arrow B direction side) using an unauthorized member (for example, a wire or a piano wire). It is possible to prevent the restriction of the displacement unit 7395 by the restriction piece 7392f from being illegally released. As a result, it can be suppressed that the displacement unit 7395 is displaced to the positioning position and the displacement unit 7395 is illegally removed from the base plate 392a.

  Further, since the restricting piece 7392f and the second displacement member 7397 are engaged with each other, the base unit side (the base plate 392a and the base plate 392a) in a state where the displacement unit 7395 is maintained at the initial biased position by the biasing force of the coil spring SP2. It is possible to suppress the wrinkles that are bent with the connecting portion) from being attached to the restricting piece 7392f.

  Next, an operation unit 8320 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 53. In the first embodiment, the case where the guided member 344 is formed in a perfect circular shape has been described. However, in the operation unit 8320 in the eighth embodiment, the guided member 8345 is formed in an elliptical annular shape. . In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 49, the overall configuration of the operation unit 8320 and the guide unit 8350 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 49A is an exploded perspective front view of the operation unit 8320 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 49B is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit 8320 and the guide unit 8350. Note that the cross-sectional view of FIG. 49B corresponds to the cross-sectional views of the operation unit 320 and the guide unit 350 in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the operation unit 8320 in the eighth embodiment includes a gripping unit 330 disposed on the front side, and a rotation unit 8340 coupled to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the gripping unit 330. .

  The rotation unit 8340 is disposed on the gripping unit 330 side, and is connected to the gripping unit 330, a front-side member 341, a back-side member 342 disposed on the back side of the front-side member 341, and a back-side member thereof. A shaft member 343 projecting in a cylindrical shape from the outer side in the radial direction from 342, an annular guided member 344 disposed in a state of surrounding the shaft member 343, and a guided member 8345; Is mainly provided.

  In the eighth embodiment, a guided member 344 is disposed on one side of a shaft member 343 that protrudes from two locations facing radially outward from the back side member 342, and the other side of the shaft member 343. A guided member 8345 is disposed on the side.

  The guided member 8345 has an outer shape that is an ellipse and an inner shape that is a perfect circle. The guided member 8345 is disposed in a state of being fastened and fixed to the shaft member 343, and is disposed in a state in which the guided member 8345 is not rotatable about the axis with respect to the shaft member 343. Further, the guided member 8345 is disposed inside the guide groove 8351 among the guide groove 351 and the guide groove 8351 formed in the guide unit 8350 described later. A guided member 344 is disposed inside the guide groove 351.

  The guide unit 8350 is disposed on the front side of the rotation unit 340 and restricts the displacement of the rotation unit 340 toward the front side. The guide unit 8350 is disposed on the back side of the rotation unit 340 and includes the rotation unit 340. A back side guide unit 370 that regulates displacement toward the back side.

  In addition, the guide unit 8350 is recessed by the connecting bottom surface of the recessed portion 362a2 and the inner peripheral surface of the first cylindrical portion 362a, and the first portion 371 and the second portion 372 of the back side guide unit 370. A guide groove 351 and a guide groove 8352 in which a part of the installation portion 362a2 is enclosed are formed. The guide groove 351 and the guide groove 8352 are formed at positions opposite to the guide unit 8350, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 49B, the guide groove 8352 extends in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 362 of the front side guide unit 360 and the first portion 371 of the back side guide unit 370. A part is formed in the shape which inclines toward the back side.

  The guide groove 8352 includes a first guide surface 351a and a second guide surface 351b that serve as guide surfaces of the guided member 8344 on the second annular member 362 side (wall surfaces that restrict movement of the guided member 8344). The third guide surface 8351c and the fourth guide surface 8351d, which are the guide surfaces of the guided member 8344 on the back side guide unit 370 side, the second annular member 362 of the front side guide unit 360, and the back side guide The unit 370 mainly includes a first end 351e and a second end 351f, which are circumferential ends of the first portion 371 of the unit 370.

  The first guide surface 351a and the third guide surface 8351c are formed to face each other. In addition, the first guide surface 351a and the third guide surface 8351c are set such that the distance between the opposing surfaces is larger than the outer dimension of the guided member 8344 in the short direction. As a result, the guided member 8344 can be moved while the movement direction is restricted by the first guide surface 351a and the third guide surface 8351c. In the following description, the moving area of the guided member 344 formed between the first guiding surface 351a and the third guiding surface 8351c is referred to as a “first guiding area”.

  The first guide surface 351a and the third guide surface 8351c are formed as wall surfaces that extend in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 362 and the first portion 371 and are inclined in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the guided member 8344 that moves in the first guide region is moved in the front-rear direction of the guide unit 350 while being moved in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 362 and the first portion 371. Accordingly, the operation unit 320 is displaced to move in the axial direction of the standing wall 341b while rotating around the center of the standing wall 341b of the rotating unit 340.

  When the force is not input to the operation unit 320 from the outside of the slot machine 10 (see FIG. 1) (the player is not operated), the rotating unit 340 is moved toward the front side by the coil spring SP1 described above. By being biased, the guided member 344 is guided to the first end portion 351e along the first guide surface 351a. Thereby, in the initial position, the guided member 344 is maintained at a position where it abuts on the first end portion 351e.

  The second guide surface 351b and the fourth guide surface 8351d are formed to face each other. Further, the second guide surface 351b extends in a direction in which the guide surface is parallel to the horizontal direction. On the other hand, the 4th guide surface 8351d is formed as a guide surface which goes to the front side as it approaches the connection part with the 1st guide surface 351a in the peripheral direction of the 2nd annular member 362 and the 1st part 371.

  The 2nd guide surface 351b and the 4th guide surface 8351d are connected with the edge part of the back side (arrow B direction side) of the 1st guide field (the 1st guide surface 351a and the 3rd guide surface 351c). . As a result, the guided member 8344 that has moved the first guide region described above to the back side (arrow B direction side) can be received between the second guide surface 351b and the fourth guide surface 8351d.

  The second guide surface 351b and the fourth guide surface 8351d are formed to face each other. In addition, the second guide surface 351b and the fourth guide surface 8351d are set such that the minimum distance between the opposing surfaces is larger than the outer dimension of the guided member 8344 in the short direction. As a result, the guided member 8344 can be moved while the movement direction thereof is restricted by the second guide surface 351b and the fourth guide surface 8351d. In the following description, the moving area of the guided member 8344 formed between the second guiding surface 351b and the fourth guiding surface 8351d is referred to as a “second guiding area”.

  The second guide surface 351b extends in a direction in which the guide surface is parallel to the horizontal direction, and the fourth guide surface 8351d is the first guide in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 362 and the first portion 371. It is formed as a guide surface that faces the front side as it approaches the connection portion with the surface 351a. Therefore, when the guided member 8344 moves on the second guide surface 351b side (front side) of the second guide region, the guided member 8344 is in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 362 and the first portion 371. The guided member 8344 is moved in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) relative to the guide unit 350 by the amount of inclination of the second guide surface in the front-rear direction.

  When the guided member 8344 moves on the fourth guide surface 8351d side (back side) of the second guide region, the guided member 8344 is in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 362 and the first portion 371. Moved to. In this case, since the guide surface of the fourth guide surface 8351d extends in parallel to the horizontal direction, the guided member 8344 is not displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) with respect to the guide unit 350. The

  In addition, a connecting portion between the third guide surface 8351c and the fourth guide surface 8351d is provided with an accommodating portion 8351m that is recessed on the back side guide unit 370 side along the guide surface of the third guide surface 8351c. The accommodating portion 8351m is an area for receiving the guided member 8344 guided through the first guiding area and rotating the guided member 8344 so that the guided member 8344 enters the second guiding area. The displacement of the guided member 8344 from the first guide area to the second guide area will be described later.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 50 to 53, the operation of the operation unit 8320 in the eighth embodiment will be described. 50 (a), 51 (a), 52 (a), and 53 (a) are front views of the operation unit 8320 and the guide unit 8350, and FIG. 50 (b) and FIG. 51 (b). 52 (b) and 53 (b) are side views of the operation unit 8320 and the guide unit 8350, and FIG. 50 (c), FIG. 51 (c), FIG. 52 (c) and FIG. (C) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit 8320 and the guide unit 8350.

  50 to 53, the transition state of the operation unit 8320 with respect to the guide unit 8350 is illustrated in order, and in FIGS. 50 (a) to 50 (c), the state in which the operation unit 8320 is arranged at the initial position is illustrated. 51 (a) to 51 (c) illustrate a state in which the operation unit 8320 is disposed at the first position, and FIGS. 52 (a) to 52 (c) illustrate the state where the operation unit 8320 is disposed at the first position. The state where the operation unit 8320 is rotated with respect to the axial direction of the guide unit 8350 is illustrated, and FIGS. 53A to 53B illustrate the state where the operation unit 8320 is disposed at the end position. .

  As shown in FIG. 50, when the operation unit 8320 is disposed at the initial position, the center lines of the circular portions 331a and 331b of the left and right cover members 331 and 332 of the grip unit 330 of the operation unit 8320 are in the horizontal direction. Are arranged in parallel. The guided member 8344 disposed inside the guide groove 8351 is disposed on the first end 351e side of the first guide region.

  Next, the operation unit 8320 is operated by the player, and the center lines of the circular portions 331a and 332a of the left and right cover members 331 and 332 of the grip unit 330 are rotated clockwise in front view, or the operation unit 320 Is operated by the player and the gripping unit 330 is pushed back (arrow B direction side), the guided member 334 of the rotating unit 340 fastened to the gripping unit 330 moves in the first guide region of the guide groove 351. To do.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 51, the gripping unit 330 is rotated clockwise in a front view. Further, the guided member 8344 disposed inside the guide groove 8351 slides in the first guide region and is disposed at a connection portion between the first guide region and the second guide region (inside the accommodating portion 8351m). Is done.

  Third, when the operation unit 8320 is operated by the player and the gripping unit 330 is displaced in the extending direction of the center lines of the circular portions 331a and 332a of the left and right cover members 331 and 332 of the gripping unit 330, As the unit 330 is displaced, the guided member 8344 is rotated inside the guide groove 7244, and the longitudinal direction of the guided member 8344 is arranged in a direction parallel to the extending direction of the second guide region. Thereby, the guided member 8344 can be slidable in the second guide region.

  In the present embodiment, the displacement direction of the center lines of the circular portions 331a and 332a of the left and right cover members 331 and 332 of the grip unit 330 of the operation unit 8320 is set upward. Thereby, when the player stops the operation of the operation unit 8320 on the way, the operation unit 8320 is shown in the first position (FIG. 41 (a) to FIG. 41 (c)) using the load of the gripping unit 330. Position).

  Finally, when the operation unit 8320 is further operated by the player and the gripping unit 330 is rotated clockwise in a front view, the guided member 8334 of the rotating unit 8340 fastened to the gripping unit 330 is moved to the guide groove 351. The second guide region is moved and disposed at a position where it abuts on the second end 351f.

  In the second guide area, unlike the first guide area, the guide surface on the back side of the guide groove 351 in which the guided member 344 is guided is extended in parallel with the horizontal direction. When the push-in operation is performed on the guide unit side (back side (arrow B direction side)), the guided member 344 does not move in the second guide region, and the guided member 344 remains at the connection portion with the first guide region. State.

  According to the operation unit 8320 of the eighth embodiment displaced as described above, the operation when the guided member 8344 moves in the first guide area and the operation when the guided member 8344 moves in the second guide area. An operation when the guided member 8344 makes the second guide region movable is required between the operations. Thereby, it can suppress that the operation unit 8320 is carelessly displaced to the terminal position.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the operation unit 320 and the guide unit 9350 in 9th Embodiment are demonstrated. In the first embodiment, the case where the guided member 344 moves between the first guidance area and the second guidance area has been described. However, in the ninth embodiment, the guided member 344 includes the first guidance area and the second guidance area. And 3 guide areas. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 54A to 54C are schematic sectional views of the operation unit 320 and the guide unit 9350 in the ninth embodiment. 54A to 54C correspond to cross sections of the operation unit 320 and the guide unit 9350 in FIG. 22D.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the guide groove 9351 formed in the guide unit 9350 in the ninth embodiment is formed by the second annular member 362 of the front side guide unit 360 and the first part 371 of the back side guide unit 370. A portion extending in the circumferential direction, a portion extending in the axial direction (arrow FB direction) of the front side guide unit 360 and the rear side guide unit 370, and a portion extending in the circumferential direction, And a portion formed in a shape inclined toward the surface.

  The guide groove 9351 includes a first guide surface 351a and a second guide surface 351b that serve as guide surfaces of the guided member 344 on the second annular member 362 side (wall surfaces that restrict the movement of the guided member 344). The third guide surface 351c and the fourth guide surface 351d, which are the guide surfaces of the guided member 344 on the back side guide unit 370 side, the second annular member 362 of the front side guide unit 360, and the back side guide From the connecting portion of the first end portion 351e and the second end portion 351f, the third guide surface 351c, and the fourth guide surface 351d, which are the end portions in the circumferential direction of the first portion 371 of the unit 370, to the back side. A rear-side recessed portion 9351k that is recessed toward the front.

  The back side recessed portion 9351k is formed with a groove width larger than the outer shape of the guided member 344, and extends toward the back side. The back-side recessed portion 9351k can move the guided member 344 in the extending direction, and the movement region will be referred to as a “third guiding region”. Note that the third guide area is formed continuously to the connecting portion between the first guide area and the second guide area, and can receive the guided member 344 that moves in the first guide area or the second guide area. The

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 54B, when the operation unit 320 is operated by the player and the gripping unit 330 is pushed to the back side (arrow B direction side), the rotation unit 340 fastened to the gripping unit 330. The guided member 334 moves in the first guide region of the guide groove 351. In this case, the guided member 344 is guided along the third guide surface 351c on the back side, and is inserted into the back side recessed portion 9351k at the connecting portion between the first guide region and the third guide region. The Thereby, the guided member 344 that moves in the first guide area can be moved to the third guide area.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54 (c), the operation unit 320 is operated by the player, and the center lines of the circular portions 331a and 332a of the left and right cover members 331 and 332 of the grip unit 330 are rotated clockwise in front view. When rotated, the guided member 334 of the rotating unit 340 fastened to the gripping unit 330 moves in the first guide region of the guide groove 351. In this case, the guided member 344 is guided along the first guide surface 351a on the front side, and is guided between the second guide surface 351b and the fourth guide surface 351d facing each other. As a result, the guided member 344 that moves in the first guide area can be moved to the second guide area.

  According to the guide unit 9350 configured as described above, the displacement of the operation unit 320 can be changed by the difference in the operation direction of the operation unit 320 (selection of push-in operation or rotation operation). As a result, a plurality of operation patterns can be formed so that the player can be easily provided with interest.

  A sensor device for detecting the displacement position of the operation unit 320 is provided, and whether the operation unit 320 has been displaced into the second guide area (whether the rotation operation has been performed) or has been displaced into the third guide area (the push operation has been performed). It is good also as a structure which detects at least.

  Specifically, a detection unit (detection piece) is formed in the operation unit 320, and a sensor device that detects the detection unit (for example, an irradiation unit that emits light and light emitted from the irradiation unit can be received) And detecting the displacement position of the operation unit 320 based on the fact that the detected portion of the operation unit 320 is arranged between the light receiving units opposed to each other and the light is blocked. There are two locations: on the displacement locus of the detected portion when the operation unit 320 is displaced to the second guide region and on the displacement locus of the detected portion when the operation unit 320 is displaced to the third guide region. The arrangement | positioning each is illustrated.

  Thereby, even if it is one operation unit 320, two types of inputs can be formed by the difference in the operation direction of the operation unit 320 (selection of pushing operation or rotation operation). Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the same number (two in the present embodiment) of controls (operation units 320) as the types of inputs, and component costs can be reduced. In addition, since a plurality of inputs (two types in the present embodiment) can be formed by one operator (operation unit 320), the operability of the player is improved (that is, it is not necessary to release the hand from the grip unit 330). And can easily add interest to the player.

  Next, an operation unit 10320 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. In the first embodiment, the case where the gripping unit 330 and the rotating unit 340 are interlocked has been described. However, in the tenth embodiment, the interlocking of the gripping unit 10330 and the rotating unit 340 can be released. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the operation unit 10320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55A is a side view of the operation unit 10320 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 55B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit 10320 taken along the line LVb-LVb in FIG. FIG. 56 is an exploded perspective view of the gripping unit 10330.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the operation unit 10320 according to the tenth embodiment includes a gripping unit 10330 disposed on the front side, and a rotation connected to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the gripping unit 10330. A unit 340.

  The gripping unit 10330 is composed of an operation element 10335 that is located on the front side and is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the side, and a connecting member 10336 that is connected to the back side of the operation element 10335.

  The operation element 10335 is disposed between the right cover member 10331 disposed on the right side when viewed from the front, the left cover member 10332 disposed on the left side when viewed from the front, and between the right cover member 10331 and the left cover member 10332. The vibration device 333 is mainly provided.

  The right cover member 10331 includes a circular portion 331a formed in a circular plate shape, and a right first wall portion 331c that protrudes from the outer edge of the circular portion 331a toward the left cover member 10332 side (arrow L direction side). A right third wall portion 331e which is located inside the right first wall portion 331c and is erected in an annular shape from the circular portion 331a, and a shaft protruding in a semicircular column shape from the circular portion 331a toward the back side A portion 10331g and an engagement portion 10331h projecting from the periphery of the shaft portion 10331g toward the back side are mainly provided.

  The left cover member 10332 is formed in substantially the same shape obtained by inverting the right cover member 10331 in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrow LR), and the left cover member 10332 is a circular plate similarly to the right cover member 10331. Than the left-side first wall portion 332c and the left-side first wall portion 332c projecting from the outer edge of the circular portion 332a toward the right cover member 10331 side (arrow R direction side). A left third wall 332e that is located on the inner side and is erected in an annular shape from the circular portion 332a, a shaft portion 10332g that protrudes in a semicircular column shape from the circular portion 332a toward the back surface, and a shaft portion 10332g And an engaging portion 10332h protruding from the periphery toward the back side.

  Therefore, in the following description, the right cover member 10331 will be described as a representative, and the description of the left cover member 332 will be omitted. Different parts of the right cover member 331 and the left cover member 332 will be described later.

  The shaft portion 10331g is combined with the shaft portion 10332g of the left cover member 10332 so that the outer shape is cylindrical. Further, the portion formed in a columnar shape by the shaft portions 10331g and 10332g is a shaft that is pivotally supported by a connecting member 10336, which will be described later, and a bulging portion that bulges radially outward at the distal end on the insertion side (back side) 10331g1 and 10332g1 are provided.

  The bulging portions 10331g1 and 10332g1 have outer diameters larger than the inner diameters of the recessed portions 10331i and 10332i that are recessed in a semicircular shape in a connecting member 10336 described later. As a result, the connecting member 10336 is disposed from the outside of the shaft portions 10331g and 10332g, and the proximal end side of the shaft portions 10331g and 10332g is accommodated inside the recessed portions 10331i and 10332i. The operating element 10335 can be pivotally supported in a rotatable state.

  The engaging portion 10331h formed on the right cover member 10331 protrudes downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the shaft portion 10331g. On the other hand, the engaging portion 10332h formed on the left cover member 10332 protrudes upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the shaft portion 10332g.

  The connecting member 10336 mainly includes a right connecting member 10336a disposed on the right side when viewed from the front and a left connecting member 10336b disposed on the left side when viewed from the front. The right connecting member 10336a is located on the back side of the right cover member 10331 described above, and the left connecting member 10336b is located on the back side of the left cover member 10332 described above.

  The right connecting member 10336a includes a protruding portion 331b extending toward the back side (arrow B direction side) and a left connecting member 10336b from an edge portion extending in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) of the protruding portion 331b. Right side second wall portion 331d projecting toward the side, projecting portion 331f projecting from the rear side end portion of the projecting portion 331b toward the back side, and left side connection from the front side end portion of the projecting portion 331b Right third wall portion 10331j projecting toward the member 10336b side.

  The left connecting member 10336b is formed in substantially the same shape obtained by inverting the right connecting member 10336a in the left-right direction, and includes a protruding portion 332b extending toward the back side (arrow B direction side), and a protruding portion. The second left wall portion 332d protruding from the edge portion extending in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) of the installation portion 332b toward the right connection member 10336a side, and the rear side from the rear side end of the projection portion 332b And a left side third wall portion 10332j that protrudes from the front side end portion of the protruding portion 331b toward the right coupling member 10336a side. Therefore, in the following description, the right connecting member 10336a is described as a representative, and the description of the left connecting member 10336b is omitted.

  The right third wall portion 10331j is formed at a position facing the back side of the right cover member 10331, and includes a recessed portion 10331i that is recessed in a semicircular shape at a position corresponding to the shaft portion 10331g of the right cover member 10331. . Further, an engaged portion 10331k is provided above the recessed portion 10331i.

  The engaged portion 10331k is a protrusion with which the engaging portion 10332h of the left cover member 10332 engages when the right cover member 10331 and the left cover member 10332 of the gripping unit 10330 are rotated. It is formed at a position that overlaps the displacement locus. When the operation unit 10320 is disposed at the initial position, the engaged portion 10331k and the engaging portion 10332h are disposed at adjacent positions (see FIG. 16B).

  Further, as described above, the operation element 10335 is pivotally supported with respect to the connecting member 10336 so that the operation element 10335 is held by the player and rotated clockwise in front view. The engaged portion 10331k and the engaging portion 10332h (the engaged portion 10332k and the engaging portion 10331h) are engaged, and the connecting member 10336 is rotationally displaced in accordance with the rotation of the operation element 10335.

  On the other hand, when the connecting member 10336 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the engagement between the engaged portion 10331k and the engaging portion 10332h (the engaged portion 10332k and the engaging portion 10331h) is released, and the connecting member Only 10336 is rotationally displaced.

  Next, the displacement of the operation unit 10320 when the player rotates and displaces the operation unit 10320 will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (a) and 57 (b) are front views of the operation unit 10320 and the guide unit 350, and FIGS. 57 (c) and 57 (d) are cross-sectional views of the operation unit 10320. 57C and 57D correspond to cross sections of the operation unit 10320 and the guide unit 350 in FIG. 55B. 57 (a) and 57 (c), the operation unit 10320 in the initial position is illustrated, and in FIGS. 57 (b) and 57 (d), the operation unit 10320 in the first position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 57, when the operator 10335 of the operation unit 10320 is rotationally displaced, the engaged portion 10331k and the engaging portion 10332h (the engaged portion 10332k and the engaging portion 10331h) are engaged. The connecting member 10336 is rotationally displaced with the rotation of the operation element 10335. Thereby, the rotary unit 340 fastened to the connecting member 10336 is rotationally displaced, and the guided member 344 of the rotary unit 340 is displaced along the guide groove 351 of the guide unit 350.

  Next, the displacement of the operation unit 10320 when the player pushes (slides) the operation unit 10320 to the back side will be described with reference to FIG. 58 (a) and 58 (b) are side views of the operation unit 10320 and the guide unit 350, and FIGS. 58 (c) and 58 (d) are cross-sectional views of the operation unit 10320. 58C and 58D correspond to the cross sections of the operation unit 10320 and the guide unit 350 in FIG. 58 (a) and 58 (c), the operation unit 10320 at the initial position is illustrated, and in FIG. 58 (b) and FIG. 58 (d), the operation unit 10320 at the position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 58, when the operation element 10335 of the operation unit 10320 is pushed (slid) to the back side, the connecting member 10336 is pushed to the back side in conjunction with the pushing operation. When the connecting member 10336 is pushed to the back side, the rotation unit 340 fastened to the connecting member 10336 is pushed to the back side. As a result, the guided member 344 of the rotation unit 340 is guided by the guide groove 351 of the guide unit 350 and the rotation unit 340 is rotated. Accordingly, the connecting member 10336 to which the rotation unit 340 is fastened is also rotated with the rotation of the rotation unit 340.

  On the other hand, since the connection member 10336 and the operation element 10335 are not fastened, only the connection member 10336 is rotated clockwise with respect to the operation element 10335. Therefore, in the tenth embodiment, when the player pushes the operation unit 10320, the operation element 10335 is not rotated, so that the operation element 10335 is opposed to the hand or finger that the player presses the operation element 10335. Is not rotated. Therefore, the player can easily operate the operation unit 10320.

  Next, a case where the player rotates the operation unit 10320 counterclockwise will be described. When the operation unit 10320 is rotationally displaced counterclockwise, the engagement between the engaged portion 10331k and the engaging portion 10332h (the engaged portion 10332k and the engaging portion 10331h) is released, and only the operation element 10335 is present. It is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

  Thereby, for example, when the player mistakenly operates and rotates the operation unit 10320 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the player can be notified that the operation direction is incorrect. Further, when the player who has finished the game is standing by holding the operation unit 10320 as an assist when standing up, the force in the counterclockwise direction input to the operating element 10335 is caused to idle in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. Thus, transmission of the force to the rotation unit 340 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 10320 from being damaged when the player holds the operation element 10335 for a purpose other than operating the operation unit 10320.

  The idle rotation of the operation element 10335 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front can be rotated to a position where the engaged portion 10331k and the engaging portion 10331h (the engaged portion 10332k and the engaging portion 10332h) come into contact with each other (this embodiment). In the embodiment, the operation element 10335 can be rotated approximately 160 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front).

  Further, the return of the operating element 10335 rotated counterclockwise in the front view to the initial position is a spring member (not shown) interposed between the shaft portions 10331g and 10332g of the operating element 10335 and the connecting member 10336. )). Thereby, the return of the operating element 10335 rotated counterclockwise in the front view to the initial position and the maintenance of the operating element 10335 at the initial position can be achieved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a guide unit 11350 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the guided member 344 is guided in the same region of the guide groove 351 by the displacement from the initial position to the end position of the operation unit 320 and the displacement from the end position to the initial position will be described. However, in the guide unit 11350 in the eleventh embodiment, the guided member 344 has different regions of the guide groove 11351 depending on the displacement from the initial position to the end position of the operation unit 320 and the displacement from the end position to the initial position. Guided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 59 (a) is a front view of the guide unit 11350 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 59 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the guide unit 11350 taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 59, the guide unit 11350 in the eleventh embodiment includes a front side guide unit 11360 disposed on the front side, and a back side guide unit 11370 disposed on the back side of the front side guide unit 11360. And comprising.

  The front-side guide unit 360 is formed by combining two members formed in an annular shape, and includes a first annular member 361 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side), and the first annular member 361. A second annular member 11362 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side).

  The second annular member 11362 includes a first cylindrical portion 11362a formed in a cylindrical shape, a cylindrical second cylindrical portion 362b projecting from the outer peripheral surface of the first cylindrical portion 11362a and surrounding the first cylindrical portion 11362a, Is provided.

  The first cylindrical portion 11362a is located at a plurality of protruding portions 362a1 protruding from the inner peripheral surface and the back side (arrow B direction side) end portion of the first cylindrical portion 11362a, and on the inner peripheral surface side of the first cylindrical portion 11362a. From the inner peripheral surface side of the first cylindrical portion 11362a toward the radially outer side of the first cylindrical portion 11362a. A housing recess 362a5.

  The recessed portion 11362a2 is a portion where the guided member 344 of the rotation unit 340 is disposed on the inner side, and is formed over the entire circumference of the inner peripheral surface of the first cylindrical portion 11362a. Further, in the recessed portion 11362a2, points A (see FIG. 59 (b)) where the distance recessed from the rear side end portion to the front side is maximized are formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the points A are formed at intervals of about 45 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  Concave portion 11362a2 is formed such that one side connected to point A is formed in a straight line toward the back side (arrow B direction side) and the other side is inclined in a straight line connected to the back side end on one side. .

  The back-side guide unit 11370 has a first part 371 formed in an annular shape, a second part 11372 protruding from the first part 371 to the front side, and a front side along the outer edge of the first part 371. And a third portion 373 provided.

  The second part 11372 protrudes along the inner edge side of the first part 371 toward the second annular member 362 side (front side). The projecting tip surface of the second portion 11372 has a predetermined distance in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) from the end of the recessed portion 11362a2 of the second annular member 11362 (the diameter of the guided member 344). It is set to a position separating a large distance).

  As a result, the guide unit 11350 is formed with a guide groove 11351 that is recessed toward the radially outer side in a part of the inner peripheral surface. The guide groove 11351 is a groove for guiding the rotation unit 340 (see FIG. 16B), and the groove width is set larger than the outer shape of the guided member 344.

  In addition, a plurality of guide grooves 11351 are continuously formed in the circumferential direction with a predetermined shape, and are formed over the inner peripheral surface of the guide unit 11350.

  The guide groove 11351 includes a first guide surface 351a that serves as a guide surface (a wall surface that restricts movement of the guided member 344) of the guided member 344 on the second annular member 11362 side (front side), and a second guide surface. 351b, a third guide surface 351c serving as a guide surface of the guided member 344 on the back side guide unit 370 side (back side), a fourth guide surface 351d, and a guide surface heading from the fourth guide surface 11351d toward the front side. The fifth guide surface 11351g and a sixth guide surface 11351h, which is a guide surface from the second guide surface toward the front side, are mainly provided.

  The fifth guide surface 11351g and the sixth guide surface 11351h are formed to face each other. In addition, the fifth guide surface 11351g and the sixth guide surface 11351h are set such that the distance between the opposing surfaces is larger than the diameter of the guided member 344. As a result, the guided member 344 can be moved while the movement direction is restricted by the fifth guide surface 11351g and the sixth guide surface 11351h. In the following description, the moving region of the guided member 344 formed between the fifth guide surface 11351g and the sixth guide surface 11351h is referred to as a “third guide region”.

  Also, the fifth guide surface 11351g is connected at one end to the fourth guide surface 351d at the end opposite to the connection side with the third guide surface 351c, and at the end opposite to the connection side with the fourth guide surface 351d. The other end side is connected to the third guide surface 351c. That is, the fifth guide surface 11351g connects the third guide surface 351c and the fourth guide surface 351d formed at positions adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction in the front-rear direction.

  The sixth guide surface 11351h is connected at one end to the second guide surface 351b at the end opposite to the connection side with the first guide surface 351a, and at the first end at the end opposite to the connection side with the second guide surface 351b. The other end side is connected to the guide surface 351a. That is, the sixth guide surface 11351h connects the first guide surface 351a and the second guide surface 351b formed at positions adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction in the front-rear direction.

  Therefore, one end side of the third guide area formed between the fifth guide face 11351g and the sixth guide face 11351h is connected to the second guide area at the end opposite to the connection side with the first guide area. The other end is connected to the first guide region at the end opposite to the connection side with the second guide region. Thereby, a plurality of third guide areas can be continuously formed in the circumferential direction from the first guide area.

  According to the guide groove 11351 formed as described above, the operation unit 320 (see FIG. 16A) does not input any force to the operation unit 320 from the outside of the slot machine 10 (see FIG. 1). In the case of non-operation), the rotating unit 340 is biased toward the front side (arrow F direction side) by the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 14), so that the guided member 344 is moved to the first guide surface. It is guided to the connecting portion (point A side) between the first guide region and the third guide region along 351a (first guide region) or the third guide region. Accordingly, when the operation unit 320 is not operated, the operation unit 320 stops (maintains) at the position where the operation unit 320 is pushed to the front side.

  Note that the sixth guide surface 11351h includes an inclined surface 11351h1 at a connection portion with the first guide region (first guide surface 351a). The inclined surface 11351h1 is a surface that guides the guided member 344, which guides the third guide region from the back side to the front side, to the first guide region using the biasing force to the front side of the coil spring SP1. The first guide surface 351a is inclined in the direction opposite to the direction in which the operation unit 320 is pushed (slided). The guided member 344 that is guided by the inclined surface 11351h1 and disposed in the first guiding region is disposed at a position where the center thereof overlaps with the third guiding surface 351c and the pushing (sliding) direction of the operation unit 320. Accordingly, when the operation unit 320 after the guided member 344 is guided from the third guide region to the first guide region along the inclined surface 11351h1 is pushed toward the back side, the guided member 344 is moved to the first side. 3 can be guided along the guide surface 351c.

  Next, the operation unit 320 is operated by the player and the gripping unit 330 is rotated clockwise in front view, or the operation unit 320 is operated by the player and the gripping unit 330 is moved to the back side (arrow B direction side). Then, the guided member 334 of the rotating unit 340 fastened to the gripping unit 330 moves in the first guiding area of the guiding groove 11351.

  Therefore, when the gripping unit 330 is rotated clockwise in front view, the guided member 344 of the rotation unit 340 fastened to the gripping unit 330 is moved in the first guide region of the guide groove 11351. In this case, as the guided member 344 is moved to the back side (arrow B direction side) with respect to the guide unit 11350, the rotation unit 340 (operation unit 320) is inserted inside the guide unit 11350. It is displaced in the direction (back side).

  After the guided member 344 moves in the first guiding area, when the gripping unit 330 is continuously rotated clockwise in front view, the guided member 334 of the rotating unit 340 fastened to the gripping unit 330 is guided into the guide groove 11351. The second guide area is moved to abut against the fifth guide surface 11351g. Thereby, the clockwise rotation of the operation unit 320 is restricted.

  When the player does not operate the operation unit 320 from the position where the clockwise rotation of the operation unit 320 is restricted (the position where the guided member 344 contacts the fifth guide surface 11351g), The rotating unit 340 is pushed to the front side by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1, and the guided member 344 moves in the third guiding region. Therefore, the operation unit 320 can be pushed to the front side at a position where the clockwise rotation of the operation unit 320 is restricted, and the operation unit 320 can be placed at the initial position. That is, each time the operation unit 320 is rotated clockwise in front view, the initial position of the operation unit 320 is changed to a position rotated clockwise by a certain amount.

  In this case, the third guide area is formed with a shorter distance for moving the guided member 344 than the combined area of the first guide area and the second guide area. In the case of an operation by an operator, the time required for the operation unit 320 to return to the initial position can be shortened and the operation unit 320 can be easily rotated clockwise in front view a plurality of times. As a result, it can suppress that a player's interest falls.

  On the other hand, from the position where the clockwise rotation of the operation unit 320 is restricted (the position where the guided member 344 contacts the fifth guide surface 11351g), the player moves the operation unit 320 to the opposite side (clockwise when viewed from the front). When the operation of the operation unit 320 is not operated after the rotation, the rotation unit 340 is pushed to the front side by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1, and the guided member 344 is moved to the second guide surface 351b, and It moves to the front side along the first guide surface 351a. Therefore, the operation unit 320 moved to the initial position is arranged at the same rotation position with the rotation position (phase) in front view of the operation unit 320 before operation.

  Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, the operation unit 320 is moved to the front depending on whether or not the player operates the operation unit 320 counterclockwise at the position where the operation of the operation unit 320 is restricted to rotate clockwise when viewed from the front. The rotational position when pushed toward the side can be changed. As a result, a variation can be given to the operation of the operation unit 320, so that it is easy to give interest to the player.

  When the operation unit 320 at the initial position is pushed by the player to the back side (arrow B direction side) and the guided member 344 moves in the first guide area, the guided member 344 moves in the second guide area. The movement of the guided member 344 is restricted by the connecting portion between the first guide area and the second guide area.

  When the guided member 344 comes into contact with the fourth guide surface 351d of the second guide area and its movement is restricted, when the player does not operate the operation unit 320, the rotating unit 340 is turned into a coil spring. The guided member 344 is pushed to the front side by the urging force of SP1 and moved to the front side along the first guide surface 351a. Therefore, the operation unit 320 moved to the initial position is arranged at the same rotation position with the rotation position (phase) in front view of the operation unit 320 before operation.

  On the other hand, when the guided member 344 comes into contact with the fourth guide surface 351d of the second guide region and its movement is restricted, the operation unit 320 is rotated clockwise from the front, and the operation is started from the initial position. Similarly to the case where the unit 320 is rotated, the guided member 334 moves in the second guide region of the guide groove 11351 and comes into contact with the fifth guide surface 11351g, so that the operation unit 320 rotates clockwise in front view. Be regulated.

  Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, the operation of the operation unit 320 that changes the rotation position (phase) in the front view of the operation unit 320 arranged at the initial position, and the rotation position of the operation unit 320 arranged in the initial position in the front view. The operation unit 320 having the same (phase) can be operated. Therefore, since a variation can be provided in the operation method of the operation unit 320, a player's interest can be heightened.

  In the eleventh embodiment, in order to detect the position of the operation unit 320 in the front-rear direction, a cylindrical detection piece (not shown) protrudes from the back side of the rotation unit 340 at the rotation center of the operation unit 320. A sensor device (not shown) for detecting the detection piece is disposed in the base unit 391 (see FIG. 14) at a position where the operation unit 320 has moved to the back side. Thereby, it is possible to detect the movement of the operation unit 320 to the back side regardless of the phase in which the operation unit 320 is arranged in front view.

  Further, the rotation unit 340 is provided with a plurality of protrusions (not shown) protruding toward the front side on the same circumference around the rotation axis of the operation unit 320. In addition, the plurality of protrusions are distributed over a half circumference of the circumference around the rotation axis of the operation unit 320. Further, the plurality of protrusions are formed at a distance from the adjacent protrusions by the amount that the initial position of the operation unit 320 is rotated in front view by one rotation operation of the operation unit 320.

  On the other hand, the reduced diameter portion 361b of the front side guide unit 360 of the guide unit 11350 is provided with a plurality of detection sensors for detecting the protrusions at positions opposed to the plurality of protrusions of the operation unit 320 disposed at the initial position. Is done. Thereby, the detection positions and the detection numbers of the plurality of protrusions can be detected for the plurality of detection sensors, and the phase of the operation unit 320 at the initial position can be detected.

  Further, in order to prevent the wire connected to the operation unit 320 from being entangled due to the rotational displacement of the operation unit 320, the wire is connected to the operation unit 320 through the rotation center position of the rotation unit 340. Moreover, a rotary connector or a slip ring is interposed in a part of the wiring.

  Next, the guide groove 12351 of the guide unit 12350 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the first end portion 351e and the second end portion 351f of the guide groove 351 are formed as separate members (the front side guide unit 360 and the back side guide unit 370) has been described. In the twelfth embodiment, the first end portion 12351e and the second end portion 351f of the guide groove 12351 are formed on the same member (back side guide unit 370). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 60A is a cross-sectional view of the guide unit 12350 in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 60B is an exploded cross-sectional view of the guide unit 12350.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the guide groove 12351 of the guide unit 12350 in the twelfth embodiment is similar to the guide groove 351 of the first embodiment, and the second annular member 362 of the front side guide unit 360 and the back surface. The first portion 371 of the side guide unit 370 is extended in the circumferential direction, and a part thereof is formed to be inclined toward the back side.

  The guide groove 12351 has a first guide surface 351a that serves as a guide surface of the guided member 344 on the second annular member 362 side (front side) (a wall surface that restricts movement of the guided member 344), and a second guide surface 351a. The guide surface 351b, the third guide surface 351c serving as the guide surface of the guided member 344 on the back side guide unit 370 side (back side), the fourth guide surface 351d, and the second ring of the front side guide unit 360 It mainly includes a member 362 and a first end 12351e and a second end 351f, which are circumferential ends of the first portion 371 of the back side guide unit 370.

  The first end 12351e in the twelfth embodiment is formed in the front side guide unit 360. Similarly, the second end portion 351f is formed in the front guide unit 360. These both end portions (first end portion 12351e and second end portion 351f) are portions that define the operation end point of the operation unit 320, and are easily damaged because the guided member 344 collides with them. Therefore, both end portions (first end portion 12351e and second end portion 351f) are formed on the same member (front side guide unit 360), so that both end portions (first end portion 12351e and second end portion) are used with use. When the portion 351f) is damaged, only one member (front side guide unit 360) needs to be replaced, and it is not necessary to replace the two members of the front side guide unit 360 and the back side guide unit 370. Thus, both end portions of the guide groove 12351 can be exchanged.

  In particular, the front-side guide unit 360 is formed in a cylindrical shape that is continuous in the circumferential direction, and has a plurality of protrusions 362a1 extending at predetermined intervals, so that the rigidity is higher than that of the back-side guide unit 370. Therefore, it is easy to suppress damage when the guided member 344 collides with both end portions (the first end portion 12351e and the second end portion 351f). Therefore, the replacement cycle can be lengthened.

  Next, the guide groove 13351 of the guide unit 13350 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the first end portion 351e and the second end portion 351f of the guide groove 351 are formed as separate members (the front side guide unit 360 and the back side guide unit 370) has been described. In the thirteenth embodiment, the first end portion 351e and the second end portion 13351f of the guide groove 13351 are formed on the same member (the back side guide unit 370). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 61A is a cross-sectional view of the guide unit 13350 in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 61B is an exploded cross-sectional view of the guide unit 13350 in the thirteenth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the guide groove 13351 of the guide unit 13350 in the thirteenth embodiment is similar to the guide groove 351 of the first embodiment, and the second annular member 362 of the front side guide unit 360 and the back surface The first portion 371 of the side guide unit 370 is extended in the circumferential direction, and a part thereof is formed to be inclined toward the back side.

  The guide groove 13351 includes a first guide surface 351a that serves as a guide surface (a wall surface that restricts movement of the guided member 344) of the guided member 344 on the second annular member 362 side (front side), and a second guide surface 351a. The guide surface 351b, the third guide surface 351c serving as the guide surface of the guided member 344 on the back side guide unit 370 side (back side), the fourth guide surface 351d, and the second ring of the front side guide unit 360 It mainly includes a member 362, and a first end 351e and a second end 13351f that are circumferential ends of the first portion 371 of the back side guide unit 370.

  The second end portion 13351f in the thirteenth embodiment is formed in the back side guide unit 370. Similarly, the first end portion 351e is formed in the back side guide unit 370. These both end portions (first end portion 12351e and second end portion 351f) are portions that define the operation end point of the operation unit 320, and are easily damaged because the guided member 344 collides with them. Therefore, both end portions (first end portion 12351e and second end portion 351f) are formed on the same member (back side guide unit 370), so that both end portions (first end portion 12351e and second end portion 317) are used with use. When the portion 351f) is damaged, only one member (the back side guide unit 370) needs to be replaced, and it is not necessary to replace the two members of the front side guide unit 360 and the back side guide unit 370.

  In particular, since the back side guide unit 370 is a member that forms the back side of the guide unit 13350, it is easy to replace only the back side guide unit 370. For example, in a configuration in which both end portions (first end portion 12351e and second end portion 351f) are formed on the front side guide unit 360, the rear side guide unit 370 is removed and the front side guide unit 360 is replaced with the first annular member. 361 and the second annular member 362 are disassembled, and it is also necessary to remove the operation unit 320 during the disassembly.

  On the other hand, if both end portions (first end portion 12351e and second end portion 351f) are formed on the rear side guide unit 370, only the rear side guide unit 370 may be removed, and the front side guide unit 360 is removed. Is not required to be disassembled into the first annular member 361 and the second annular member 362, and the operation unit 320 need not be removed. Therefore, the replacement man-hours can be reduced and the replacement cost can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62A, a guide unit 14350 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement directions in the circumferential direction of the first guide region and the second guide region of the guide groove 351 are set to be the same is described, but the guide groove 14351 in the fourteenth embodiment is The displacement directions in the circumferential direction of the first guide area and the second guide area are set to be opposite. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 62A is a sectional view of the guide unit 14350 in the fourteenth embodiment. Note that the cross section of FIG. 62A corresponds to the cross section of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 62A, the guide groove 14351 of the guide unit 14350 in the fourteenth embodiment is formed by the second annular member 362 of the front side guide unit 360 and the first portion 371 of the back side guide unit 370. It extends in the circumferential direction, and a part thereof is formed in a shape inclined toward the back side.

  The guide groove 14351 includes a first guide surface 351a and a second guide surface that serve as a guide surface of the guided member 344 (a wall surface that defines the movement of the guided member 344) when the operation unit 320 is rotated. 14351b, a third guide surface 351c and a fourth guide surface 14351d that serve as guide surfaces of the guided member 344 (a wall surface that defines the movement of the guided member 344) when the operation unit 320 is pushed. The first end portion 351e, the second end portion 14351f, and the third end portion 14351i are formed at three end portions in the direction.

  The second guide surface 14351b and the fourth guide surface 14351d are formed to face each other. Further, the second guide surface 14351b and the fourth guide surface 14351d are the end points of the first guide region (first end portion 351e) formed between the first guide surface 351a and the third guide surface 351c. And extends in the horizontal direction (direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the operation unit 320) from the end of the first guide region. That is, the second guide region formed between the second guide surface 14351b and the fourth guide surface 14351d is formed with the second end portion 14351f as the start end and the third end portion 14351i as the end point.

  The second guide surface 14351b and the fourth guide surface 14351d are set such that the minimum distance between the opposing surfaces is larger than the diameter of the guided member 344. Accordingly, the guided member 344 can be moved while the movement direction is restricted by the second guide surface 14351b and the fourth guide surface 14351d.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the movement direction of the guided member 344 in the circumferential direction when moving the first guide area toward the second plan area, and the second guide area toward the terminal end (third end portion 14351i). The movement direction in the circumferential direction of the guided member 344 when moving in the opposite direction is set to the opposite direction.

  Therefore, in order to displace the operation unit 320 from the initial position to the end position, the player needs to switch the rotation direction of the operation unit 320 to the opposite direction (for example, from the right rotation to the left rotation). As a result, it is possible to cause the player to perform a complicated operation of the operation unit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  In addition, since the second guide area (fourth guide surface 14351d) extends in the horizontal direction (direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the operation unit 320), when the operation unit 320 is pushed in, the guided member 344 is provided. Cannot be moved to the third end portion 14351i along the second guide region.

  Furthermore, the movement direction of the guided member 344 from the start end to the end in the second guide region is set to be the same as the direction in which the guided member 344 moves by the biasing force of the coil spring SP2 (see FIG. 27A). Since the second guide surface 14351b that is pushed forward by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 14) and contacts the guided member 344 extends in the horizontal direction, the second guide surface 14351b is guided to the end of the second guide region. The guided member 344 can be maintained in contact with the third end portion 14351i.

  Thereby, when returning the operation unit 320 in a state where the guided member 344 is guided to the position where the guided member 344 is in contact with the third end portion 14351i to the initial position, the player performs an operation of rotating the operation unit 320 clockwise in the front direction. Can be made. Therefore, the operation of the operation unit 320 can be complicated, and it can be suppressed that the operation of the operation unit 320 becomes monotonous and the player's interest is reduced.

  In addition, since the rotation direction when the operation unit 320 arranged at the end position is returned and the rotation direction when the operation unit 320 arranged at the initial position is displaced can be the same direction, the player can It is possible to prevent the operation unit 320 from rotating in the wrong direction.

  In this manner, the operation unit 320 is displaced from the initial position (position where the guided member 344 is disposed at the first end 351e) to the end position (position where the guided member 344 reaches the third end 14351i). As a result, it is possible to require the player to perform a two-step operation (an operation for switching the rotation direction in the middle). Therefore, it can suppress that an operation feeling becomes monotonous. Further, it is possible to avoid the operation unit 320 from being displaced to the end position (the position where the guided member 344 reaches the third end portion 14351i) only by the pushing operation. That is, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 320 from being displaced to the end position due to an inadvertent operation by the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62B, a guide unit 15350 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the first guide area and the second guide area of the guide groove 351 are set to have the same displacement direction in the circumferential direction has been described. However, the guide groove 15351 in the fifteenth embodiment is The displacement directions in the circumferential direction of the first guide area and the second guide area are set to be opposite. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 62B is a cross-sectional view of the guide unit 15350 in the fifteenth embodiment. Note that the cross section of FIG. 62B corresponds to the cross section of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 62B, the guide groove 15351 of the guide unit 15350 in the fifteenth embodiment is formed by the second annular member 362 of the front side guide unit 360 and the first portion 371 of the back side guide unit 370. It extends in the circumferential direction and is formed in a shape that is inclined toward the back side as a whole.

  The guide groove 15351 includes a first guide surface 351a and a second guide surface 15351b that serve as a guide surface of the guided member 344 (a wall surface that defines the movement of the guided member 344) when the operation unit 320 is rotated. The third guide surface 351c and the fourth guide surface 15351d, which serve as guide surfaces (wall surfaces that define the movement of the guided member 344) when the operation unit 320 is pushed, Three first end portions 351e, second end portions 15351f, and third end portions 15351i formed at the end portions are provided.

  The second guide surface 15351b and the fourth guide surface 15351d are formed to face each other. The second guide surface 15351b and the fourth guide surface 15351d are the end points of the first guide region (first end portion 351e) formed between the first guide surface 351a and the third guide surface 351c. And is extended in the circumferential direction while inclining from the terminal end of the first guide region to the side opposite to the first guide region. That is, the second guide region formed between the second guide surface 15351b and the fourth guide surface 15351d is formed starting from the second end 15351f and ending at the third end 15351i.

  The second guide surface 15351b and the fourth guide surface 15351d are set such that the minimum distance between the opposing surfaces is larger than the diameter of the guided member 344. Thereby, the guided member 344 can be moved while the movement direction is regulated by the second guide surface 15351b and the fourth guide surface 15351d.

  When the player pushes (slides) the operation unit 320 toward the back side, the player moves along the third guide surface 351c in the first guide region and the fourth guide surface 15351d in the second guide region. The guided member 344 can be moved. Therefore, when the player pushes and displaces the operation unit 320 toward the back side, the operation unit 320 can be displaced from the initial position to the end position without changing the displacement direction of the operation unit 320.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, the movement direction of the guided member 344 in the circumferential direction when moving the first guide area toward the second plan area, and the second guide area toward the terminal end (third end portion 14351i). The movement direction in the circumferential direction of the guided member 344 when moving in the opposite direction is set to the opposite direction.

  Therefore, in order to displace the operation unit 320 from the initial position to the end position, the player needs to switch the rotation direction of the operation unit 320 to the opposite direction (for example, from the right rotation to the left rotation). As a result, it is possible to cause the player to perform a complicated operation of the operation unit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, since the second guide region (fourth guide surface 14351d) is inclined and extended, the guided member 344 is moved along the second guide region even when the operation unit 320 is pushed. It can be moved to the third end 14351i.

  In this manner, the operation unit 320 is displaced from the initial position (position where the guided member 344 is disposed at the first end 351e) to the end position (position where the guided member 344 reaches the third end 14351i). If it is a rotation operation, it is possible to require the player to perform a two-step operation (an operation to switch the rotation direction halfway). Therefore, it can suppress that an operation feeling becomes monotonous. On the other hand, in the case of a push-in operation, the operation unit 320 is moved from the initial position (position where the guided member 344 is disposed at the first end 351e) to the end position (position where the guided member 344 reaches the third end 14351i). ) Can be displaced by one-way operation.

  That is, in any of the rotation operation and the push-in operation, the operation unit 320 is moved from the initial position (position where the guided member 344 is disposed at the first end portion 351e) to the end position (the guided member 344 is the third position). (Position reaching the end portion 14351i) can be displaced so that the player can arbitrarily select the type of operation. As a result, variations in operation feeling can be given.

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of one or more other embodiments.

  In the first embodiment, the back side guide unit 370 has been described as being formed of one member to which the first part 371 and the second part 372 are connected. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the back side guide unit 370 may be formed by forming the first part 371 and the second part 372 from different members and assembling the first part 371 and the second part 372.

  In this case, by forming the first part 371 and the second part 372 separately, the shapes of the first part 371 and the second part 372 can be easily complicated. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the rear side guide unit 370 can be improved, and variations in the moving direction of the guided member 344 that is displaced along the rear side guide unit 370 can be increased.

  In the first embodiment, the second guide surface 351b of the guide groove 351 is inclined so as to extend in the circumferential direction while approaching the front side (arrow F direction side) as it approaches the connecting portion with the first guide surface 351a. When the operation unit 320 formed as a guide surface and guided to the position where the guided member 344 contacts the second end 351f is not operated, the first biasing force to the front side of the coil spring SP1 is used. Although the case where the guided member 344 is guided to the first guide region along the two guide surfaces 351b has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto.

  For example, the extending direction of the second guide surface 351b in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 362 may be extended in parallel with the horizontal direction, or the second guide surface in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 362 The extending direction of 351b may be extended in the direction close to the front side while being separated from the first guide surface 351a.

  In this case, it is possible to suppress the guided member 344 from moving toward the first guide region due to the biasing force toward the front side of the coil spring SP1. That is, the guided member 344 can be maintained at a position where it abuts against the second end 351f. Therefore, when returning the operation unit 320 in a state where the guided member 344 is guided to the position where the guided member 344 is in contact with the second end portion 351f to the initial position, an operation to rotate the operation unit 320 counterclockwise is performed on the player. Can be made. Therefore, the operation of the operation unit 320 can be complicated, and it can be suppressed that the operation of the operation unit 320 becomes monotonous and the player's interest is reduced.

  When the guided member 344 of the rotating unit 340 is guided toward the first guiding region side by the biasing force of the coil spring SP2 of the base unit 391, the second guiding in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 362 is performed. By increasing the inclination angle of the surface 351b to the front side, the guided member 344 can be maintained at a position where it abuts against the second end 351f.

  Further, when the extending direction of the second guide surface 351b in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 362 is extended in parallel with the horizontal direction, when the operation unit 320 is rotated from the initial position to the end position, The guided member 344 is guided to the first guide region and the second guide region, which have different extending directions, so that the slide displacement toward the back side with respect to the rotation amount of the operation unit 320 is not caused during the rotation of the operation unit 320. Displacement. That is, the slide displacement to the back side is not formed while the operation unit 320 is being rotationally displaced. Thereby, interest can be given to the operation of the operation unit 320.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the displacement unit 5395 is prevented from being displaced to the front side of the base plate 5392a by the two flange portions 5396m has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, one end side (back side) in the axial direction of the roller 5396j formed in an annular shape is enlarged in diameter than the width of the sliding groove 5392a2, and the displacement unit 5395 is displaced to the front side of the base plate 5392a by the roller 5396j. You may suppress doing. In this case, after the displacement unit 5395 is disposed on the front surface of the base plate 5392a, the roller 5396j is attached, and the displacement unit 5395 is disposed on the base unit 5391.

  In the fifth embodiment, the size in the circumferential direction of the engagement hole 5396b1 with the center of the main body 396a as the axis is substantially the same as the size in the circumferential direction of the engagement piece 342b with the center of the main body 396a as the axis. Although the case where the displacement between the displacement unit 5395 and the operation unit 320 is always interlocked has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto.

  For example, the size in the circumferential direction of the engagement hole 5396b1 with the center of the main body 396a as the axis may be set larger than the size in the circumferential direction of the engagement piece 342b with the center of the main body 396a as the axis. In this case, a difference is provided between the timing at which the displacement unit 5395 is operated and the timing at which the operation unit 320 is operated by an amount of a gap in the circumferential direction around the center of the main body 396a between the engagement hole 5396b1 and the engagement piece 342b. Can do.

  In the fifth embodiment, the displacement direction of the first displacement member 5396 (displacement unit 5395) is determined by the roller 5396j disposed on the rotation shaft portion 5396i of the first displacement member 5396 and the sliding groove 5392a2 of the base member 5392. Although the case where it restrict | limits was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this.

  For example, the rotation shaft portion 5396i of the first displacement member 5396 is not formed (the roller 5396j is not mounted), and the displacement direction of the first displacement member 5396 (displacement unit 5395) is changed between the two flange portions 5396m and the base member 5392. You may restrict | limit with the sliding groove | channel 5392a2. In this case, since the two flange portions 5396m are formed to be elastically deformable, the meshing state between the tooth portion 5396k of the first displacement member 5396 and the pinion 5398a is deteriorated, and the resistance between the tooth portion 5396k and the pinion 5398a is large. In this case, the collar portion 5396m can be elastically deformed to stabilize the engagement between the tooth portion 5396k and the pinion 5398a.

  In this case, it is preferable that the two flange portions 5396m are set so that the distance between the outer sides in the opposing direction in the radial direction of the main body portion 396a is substantially the same as the width direction of the sliding groove 5392a2. Accordingly, when the flange portion 5396m is elastically deformed in the direction in which the engagement with the sliding groove 5392a2 is released, it is possible to suppress the elimination of the overlap margin in the front-rear direction between the tip of the flange portion 5396m and the base plate 5392a. . As a result, it can suppress that engagement with the sliding groove 5392a2 of the collar part 5396m is cancelled | released.

  Further, the two flange portions 5396m are in a state in which the distance between the outer sides in the opposing direction in the radial direction of the main body portion 396a is set larger than the width direction of the sliding groove 5392a2, and the flange portions 5396m are elastically deformed. May be engaged with the sliding groove 5392a2. In this case, since the force required for elastic deformation of the flange portion 5396m in the direction of releasing the engagement with the sliding groove 5392a2 can be increased, the engagement between the flange portion 5396m and the sliding groove 5392a2 is released. Can be suppressed.

  In the seventh embodiment, the case where the second protrusion 7392f2 is formed on the restriction piece 7392f and the recess 7397f1 is formed on the second displacement member 7397 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a concave portion may be formed on the restriction piece 7392f and a convex portion may be formed on the second displacement member 7397. When the displacement unit 7395 is disposed at the initial biasing position, the restriction piece 7392f and the second displacement member What is necessary is just to engage with 7397.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case has been described in which the operation element 10335 is formed so as to be able to rotate in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the connecting member 10336, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when the bulging portions 10331g1 and 10332g1 of the operating element 10335 are deformed and the operating element 10335 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the bulging parts 10331g1 and 10332g2 are formed on the protruding portions 331b and 332b of the connecting member 10336. It may be abutted to regulate the counterclockwise rotation of the operation element 10335 when viewed from the front.

  In this case, it is not necessary for the operation unit 10320 to include means (for example, a spring member) for returning the operation element 10335 to the initial position, so that the number of parts of the operation unit 10320 can be reduced. Further, the operation unit 10320 can be easily assembled.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where the operating element 10335 rotated counterclockwise in the front view is returned to the initial position by the biasing force of the spring member has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The center of gravity of the child 10335 is set to the lower position of the operator 10335 arranged at the initial position, and the operator 10335 rotated counterclockwise is returned to the initial position by its own weight. It may be.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the guide groove 11351 is formed from the first guide area, the second guide area, and the third guide area has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second guide area The guide groove 111351 may be formed only by the first guide region and the third guide region.

  In this case, when the player pushes the operation unit 320 toward the back side, the guided member 344 that moves in the first guide region is moved along the third guide surface 351c, and the third guide is moved from the first guide region to the third guide. Moved to an area. Therefore, when the player pushes the operation unit 320 and does not operate the operation unit 320, the rotating unit 340 is pushed to the front side by the urging force of the coil spring SP1, and the guided member 344 performs the third guidance. Move the area toward the front.

  The third guide area is formed with a shorter distance for moving the guided member 344 than the first guide area. Therefore, when the player operates the operation unit 320 a plurality of times in succession, the initial position of the operation unit 320 is determined. It is possible to shorten the time taken to return to the operation and to easily operate the operation unit 320 a plurality of times. As a result, it can suppress that a player's interest falls.

  In the eleventh embodiment, in order to detect the position of the operation unit 320 in the front-rear direction, a case has been described in which a cylindrical detection piece protrudes from the back side of the rotation unit at the rotation center of the operation unit 320. It is not limited to this. For example, an annular projecting wall with the rotation center of the operation unit 320 as an axis may project from the back side of the rotating unit 340, and the sensor device may be disposed at a position where the projecting wall can be detected.

  In the first, third, and fifth embodiments, the case where the displacement units 395, 3395, 5395, and 7395 are rotationally displaced when viewed from the front is described. However, the displacement units 395, 3395, 5395, and 7395 are configured as described above. The displacement units 2395 and 4395 in the second and fourth embodiments may be linearly displaced. On the contrary, in the second and fourth embodiments, the case where the displacement units 2395 and 4395 are linearly displaced has been described. However, the displacement units 395, 3395, 5395, and 7395 in the first, third, and fifth to seventh embodiments are described. It may be rotationally displaced.

  The displacement units 395, 2395, 3395, 4395, 5395, and 7395 in the first to seventh embodiments may be combined.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is embodied with respect to the slot machine 10 has been shown. However, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are integrated. That is, in the slot machine, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions, a gaming machine having a ball insertion and ball payout function such as a pachinko machine may be used. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, a medal as a gaming value in a current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. The problem of the burden on the equipment and the restriction of the location of the gaming machine due to the separate handling of the ball and the ball can be solved.

  It is also possible to apply the present invention to a pachinko machine. In the case of a pachinko machine, a gaming machine main body is mounted on the outer frame, and a door member is provided on the front side of the gaming machine main body. The game machine body is provided with a game board in which a game area as a game ball flight area is formed and an operation port and a liquid crystal display device are installed, and the game area and liquid crystal are provided by a visual window provided on the door member. The display device is visible. Then, as the game ball launched by the game ball launching device wins the operating opening, an internal lottery is performed and a variable display of the pattern is performed on the liquid crystal display device. Even when the configuration of the display control device and the sub-control device of the above-described embodiment is applied to such a pachinko machine, it is apparent that the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be obtained.

  Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused may be used.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<About the concept of the invention using the base unit 390 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a base member, a displacement member disposed to be displaceable on the base member, and a holding means for holding the displacement member on the base member, the holding means is formed to be elastically deformable. When the displacement member is mounted on the base member, the elastic portion in contact with the displacement member is elastically deformed, and the mounting of the displacement member to the base member is permitted. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that when the displacement member mounted on the base member comes into contact with the elastic portion, the displacement of the displacement member in the contact direction is restricted by the elastic portion.

  Here, a gaming machine in which a displacement member is slidably disposed on a base member is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-130539). In this technique, a groove is opened in the base member, and the protrusion of the displacement member is inserted into the groove. Therefore, the end point of the slide displacement of the displacement member is defined by the protrusion projecting against the end of the groove. A collar larger than the groove width is fastened and fixed to the tip of the protrusion. Thereby, a displacement member is hold | maintained at a base member and the dropping-out is prevented.

  There is also known a gaming machine that defines a slide displacement end point by positioning a wall portion standing from a base member on a displacement locus of a displacement member and bringing the displacement member into contact with the wall portion ( For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2017-29609). The base member is provided with a lid member, and the displacement member is accommodated between the base member and the lid member. Thereby, a displacement member is hold | maintained at a base member and the dropping-out is prevented.

  However, the conventional gaming machine exemplified above requires not only separate parts such as a collar and a lid member, but also requires fastening these separate parts to the base member with screws, which increases the number of steps. Therefore, there is a problem that the product cost increases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the elastic member is elastically deformed so that the displacement member is attached to the base member, and after the attachment, the displacement of the displacement member is regulated by the elastic portion that has been elastically recovered. . That is, the displacement member is held by the base member. Therefore, not only a separate part is unnecessary, but also a process of attaching the separate part can be unnecessary, so that the product cost can be reduced correspondingly.

  In the gaming machine A1, the displacement member is displaced between a first position and a second position, and the displacement member is at least a displacement trajectory when being displaced between the first position and the second position. The gaming machine A2 is mounted on the base member by being displaced along the displacement restriction after being displaced in a direction perpendicular to the displacement locus at a position overlapping with a part thereof.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the displacement member is orthogonal to the displacement trajectory at a position that overlaps at least a part of the displacement trajectory when being displaced between the first position and the second position. Since it is mounted on the base member by being displaced along the displacement restriction after being displaced in the direction to be moved, the displacement member may be superimposed on the displacement locus of the displacement member when the displacement member is mounted on the base member. it can. Therefore, the space on the base member required when mounting the displacement member can be reduced by the amount of overlap.

  In the gaming machine A2, a protrusion that protrudes from one of the base member or the displacement member, and a recess that is formed so that the protrusion can pass therethrough and is recessed in the other of the base member or the displacement member. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the displacement trajectory at a position overlapping at least a part of the displacement trajectory when the protrusion is passed through the recess.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the protrusion is passed through the recess, so that the displacement member is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the displacement locus at a position overlapping at least a part of the displacement locus. Therefore, the overlap margin between the displacement locus of the displacement member and the displacement member when the displacement member is attached to the base member can be further increased. Therefore, the space on the base member required when mounting the displacement member can be further reduced.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the elastic portion is engaged with the base member or the displacement member in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the first position.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the elastic portion is engaged with the base member or the displacement member in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the first position. It is possible to suppress elastic deformation in the contact direction each time the member or the displacement member is contacted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deformation portion from being attached to the elastic portion.

  In the gaming machine A4, the gaming machine A5 is provided with a biasing means that applies a biasing force to the displacement member in a direction to hold the displacement member in the first position.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A4, the gaming machine A5 includes biasing means that applies a biasing force to the displacement member in the direction of holding the displacement member in the first position. The state of being in contact with and engaging with the displacement member (a state in which the elastic deformation of the elastic portion is restricted) can be maintained. Therefore, it can suppress that an elastic part is elastically deformed illegally and a displacement member is removed.

<About the concept of the invention using the base unit 390 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising: a base member; a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member; and a holding unit that holds the displacement member on the base member. One of the displacement members is provided with an elastic portion disposed so as to be elastically deformable, and the displacement member is held by the elastic portion on the base member.

  Here, a gaming machine in which a displacement member is slidably disposed on a base member is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-130539). In this technique, a groove is opened in the base member, and the protrusion of the displacement member is inserted into the groove. Therefore, the end point of the slide displacement of the displacement member is defined by the protrusion projecting against the end of the groove. A collar larger than the groove width is fastened and fixed to the tip of the protrusion. Thereby, a displacement member is hold | maintained at a base member and the dropping-out is prevented.

  There is also known a gaming machine that defines a slide displacement end point by positioning a wall portion standing from a base member on a displacement locus of a displacement member and bringing the displacement member into contact with the wall portion ( For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2017-29609). The base member is provided with a lid member, and the displacement member is accommodated between the base member and the lid member. Thereby, a displacement member is hold | maintained at a base member and the dropping-out is prevented.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine exemplified above, there is a problem that assembly is complicated because it is necessary to fasten and fix other parts such as a collar and a lid member to the base member with screws.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the holding means includes an elastic portion that is disposed on one of the base member and the displacement member so as to be elastically deformable, and the displacement member is held on the base member by the elastic portion. Further, it is not necessary to fasten and fix other parts such as a collar and a lid member with screws. Therefore, assembly can be facilitated.

  In the gaming machine B1, the displacement member is held in the base member by the elastic portion by being displaced in one direction.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the displacement member is displaced in one direction and is held by the elastic portion on the base member, so that it is not necessary to perform a complicated operation. That is, for example, the displacement member can be held on the base member by a simple operation such as pushing in one direction. Therefore, assembly can be facilitated.

  In the gaming machine B2, the holding means includes an engaging portion that is disposed on one of the base member or the displacement member and is formed to be engageable with the other of the base member or the displacement member. The gaming machine is characterized in that the base member or the displacement member is held in the base member by the elastic portion by being displaced in one direction while being engaged with the engaging portion. B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the holding means includes an engaging portion disposed on one of the base member and the displacement member and formed to be engageable with the other of the base member or the displacement member. With the other of the displacement members engaged with the engaging portion, the base member is held by the elastic portion by being displaced in one direction. Therefore, since the portion engaged with the engaging portion can be displaced in one direction with the fulcrum as a fulcrum, assembly can be facilitated in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2.

  Further, since the engaging portion can be used in addition to the elastic portion as a portion for holding the displacement member on the base member, the holding strength can be improved. Therefore, it is difficult to drop the displacement member from the base member.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the holding means includes an opening that is opened to the other of the base member or the displacement member and extends along a displacement direction of the displacement member, and the opening includes the opening A gaming machine B4, wherein an elastic part is inserted.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the holding means has an opening that is opened to the other of the base member or the displacement member and extends along the displacement direction of the displacement member. Since the elastic portion is inserted through the opening, space efficiency can be improved. That is, both the function of guiding the displacement of the displacement member with respect to the base member and the function of holding the displacement member on the base member can be combined with the opening and the elastic portion. Therefore, space efficiency can be improved compared with the case where both functions are provided separately.

  In the gaming machine B4, the displacement member is formed as a rack in which teeth are engraved along the outer edge thereof.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4, the displacement member is formed as a rack in which teeth are engraved along the outer edge thereof, so that the engraving range of the teeth can be easily secured. That is, as described above, the function of guiding the displacement and the function of holding the displacement can be assigned to the opening and the elastic portion, and it is not necessary to provide both these functions on the outer edge of the displacement member. Therefore, the tooth engraving range can be secured on the outer edge of the displacement member accordingly.

<About the concept of the invention using the base unit 390 as an example>
In a gaming machine including an operation element formed to be displaceable by a player's operation, the game machine includes a first member that comes into contact with the operation element in a predetermined displacement region, and the operation of the operation element is performed by contacting the first member A gaming machine C1 characterized in that the feeling is changed.

  Here, a gaming machine provided with an operator is known (for example, JP-A-2017-29609). Examples of the operation element include a button that can be pressed and a lever that can be rotated.

  However, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to grasp the operation position of the operator.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine C1 includes a first member that contacts the operation element in a predetermined displacement region, and the operation feeling of the operation element is changed by the contact with the first member. Based on the change in operation feeling, it is possible to easily grasp the operation position of the operation element.

  In the gaming machine C1, the first member increases a reaction force that acts on the operating element as the operating element approaches a predetermined position.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the first member increases the reaction force that acts on the operating element as the operating element approaches the predetermined position, so that the operating element approaches the predetermined position. Can be easily recognized by the player.

  The gaming machine C2 includes a base member on which the operating element is displaceably disposed, and the first member collides with the operating element or the base member when the operating element exceeds the predetermined position. A gaming machine C3 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2, the operating member is provided with a base member that is displaceably disposed. When the operating member exceeds a predetermined position, the first member is operated by the operating member or the base member. Therefore, the vibration can be transmitted to the operation element by the collision. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the operating element has been displaced to a predetermined position.

  In the gaming machine C3, the first member collides with the base member when the operating element exceeds the predetermined position.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3, the first member collides with the base member when the operating element exceeds a predetermined position, so that damage to the operating element can be suppressed. Since the operation element is disposed on the base member, vibration due to the collision of the first member can be transmitted to the operation element via the base member.

  In any of the gaming machines C2 to C4, the first member is formed as an elastic body that is elastically deformed by contact with the operation element, and when the operation element exceeds the predetermined position, The gaming machine C5 is released from contact and collides with the base member or the operating element by elastic recovery.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C2 to C4, the first member is formed as an elastic body that is elastically deformed by contact with the operating element, and the operating element exceeds a predetermined position. Then, the contact with the operating element is released and the elastic member recovers and collides with the base member or the operating element, so that the structure can be simplified. That is, the elastic deformation of the first member and the elastic recovery thereof can form a reaction force that acts on the operation element and a displacement of the first member due to a collision with the operation element or the base member. In addition, it is not necessary to separately provide an actuator for causing a collision.

  In the gaming machine C5, when the operating element is displaced beyond a predetermined position, the first member is released from contact with the operating element and collides with the operating element or the base member due to its elastic recovery. A gaming machine C6 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, the first member is released from contact with the operating element when the operating element is displaced beyond a predetermined position, and the operating element is recovered by its elastic recovery. Or, since it is a mechanical structure that collides with the base member, that is, utilizes the elastic deformation of the first member and its elastic recovery, for example, the reliability can be improved compared to the case where it is electrically controlled using an actuator. It can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C5 or C6, the first member includes a collision part that collides with one of the base member or the operation element, and when the collision part is damaged, the other part of the first member is A gaming machine C7 that collides with a base member or the operation element.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5 or C6, the first member includes a collision part that collides with one of the base member or the operation element. Since the other part of the member collides with the base member or the operation element, transmission of vibration to the operation element can be reliably formed. That is, even when the collision portion is broken, the player can recognize that the operating element has been displaced to a predetermined position.

  In any of the gaming machines C5 to C7, the operating element is displaceable between a first position where the operating element can be in contact with the first member and a second position where the operating element is not in contact with the first member. When the operation element is displaced in the first direction, the displacement member is disposed at the first position, and the operation element is displaced in the second direction opposite to the first direction. The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the displacement member is disposed at the second position.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C5 to C7, the operating element is in a first position where the operating element can be brought into contact with the first member, and in the second position in which the operating member is not in contact with the first member A displacement member displaceable with respect to the position, and when the operation element is displaced in the first direction, the displacement member is disposed in the first position, and the operation element is in a direction opposite to the first direction. In the case of displacement in the direction, since the displacement member is arranged at the second position, the operational feeling is changed only when the operation element is displaced in the first direction, and when the operation element is displaced in the second direction. The feeling of operation can be left unchanged. Therefore, even when the operating element is displaced in any direction, it is possible to avoid changing the operational feeling, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  In the gaming machine C8, the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position by contacting the first member when the operation element is displaced in the second direction. Characteristic gaming machine C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C8, the displacement member is brought into contact with the first member when the operation element is displaced in the second direction, so that the first position is changed to the second position. Since it is displaced, it is not necessary to separately provide a structure for displacing the displacement member, and this structure can be used also as the first member. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine C9, the base member includes an engagement piece that displaces the displacement member from the second position to the first position when the operation element is disposed at a terminal end in the second direction. Game machine C10.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C9, the base member is engaged to displace the displacement member from the second position to the first position when the operation element is disposed at the terminal end in the second direction. Since the piece is provided, the displacement member can be brought into contact with the first member when the operation element is displaced in the first direction.

  In the gaming machine C10, the engaging piece is formed so as to be elastically deformable.

  According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C10, the engagement piece is formed to be elastically deformable, so that the displacement member is engaged when the operation element is disposed at the end in the second direction. Even if it collides with the piece, the impact due to the collision can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the engaging piece. Therefore, damage to the displacement member can be suppressed.

<Concept of Invention with Displacement Unit 300 (Operation Unit 320) as an Example>
In a gaming machine having an operation element formed so as to be displaceable from a first position to a second position by a player's operation, an operation in a first direction or a direction different from the first direction is performed in a second direction. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the operation element is displaced from the first position to the second position in any direction of operation.

  Here, a gaming machine provided with an operator is known (for example, JP-A-2017-29609). Examples of the operation element include a button that can be pressed and a lever that can be rotated.

  However, the conventional gaming machine exemplified above has a problem that the operational feeling is monotonous.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the operation element is moved from the first position to the first position in either the operation in the first direction or the operation in the second direction, which is a direction different from the first direction. Since it is displaced to two positions, the player can arbitrarily select the type of operation. As a result, variations in operation feeling can be given.

  In the gaming machine D1, the operation element is formed to be displaceable from the second position to the third position, and the operation element is displaced from the second position to the third position by an operation in the second direction, In the operation in the first direction, the gaming machine D2 is characterized in that displacement of the operation element from the second position to the third position is restricted.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the operation element is displaced from the second position to the third position by the operation in the second direction, and the second operation of the operation element is performed in the operation in the first direction. Since the displacement from the position to the third position is restricted, the operation of displacing the operating element from the first position to the third position can be complicated (formation of a mixture of one-stage operation and two-stage operation). That is, in the operation in the first direction, the displacement of the operation element from the first position to the third position cannot be completed (after that, it is necessary to further perform the operation in the second direction at the second position). If the operation is performed in two directions, the displacement of the operation element from the first position to the third position can be completed with one operation.

  In the gaming machine D1, the operation element is formed to be displaceable from the second position to the third position, and is operated by the operation in the third direction which is different from both the first direction and the second direction. The operation element is displaced from the second position to the third position, and the operation of the operation element from the second position to the third position is restricted in the operation in the first direction and the second direction. A gaming machine D3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the operating element is moved from the second position to the third position by an operation in a third direction that is different from both the first direction and the second direction. In the operations in the first direction and the second direction, since the displacement of the operation element from the second position to the third position is restricted, the operation element is displaced from the first position to the third position. , Can require two-step operation. Therefore, it can suppress that an operation feeling becomes monotonous. In addition, the operator can be prevented from being inadvertently displaced (operated) from the second position to the third position.

  That is, after the operation element is displaced from the first position to the second position by the operation in the first direction or the operation in the second direction, the third direction which is different from the first direction or the second direction is then applied. Unless the operation in the direction is performed, the operation element cannot be displaced to the third position.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, one of the operation in the first direction or the operation in the second direction is an operation for rotating the operation element, and the operation in the first direction or the operation in the second direction The other is a game machine D4, which is an operation of moving the operating element directly.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, one of the operation in the first direction or the operation in the second direction is an operation for rotating the operation element, and the operation in the first direction Alternatively, since the other operation in the second direction is an operation in which the operation element is linearly moved, the difference in the operation direction can be significant. Therefore, the change in operational feeling due to the operation in different directions can be made clearer.

  In the gaming machine D4, a direction of a rotation axis of rotation in one of the operation in the first direction or the operation in the second direction, and a direction of linear motion in the other of the operation in the first direction or the operation in the second direction A gaming machine D5, characterized in that they are parallel.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation in one of the first direction operation and the second direction operation, and the first direction operation or the second direction operation Since the direction of linear motion on the other side is made parallel, it is possible to easily displace the operation element from the first position to the second position in either the operation in the first direction or the operation in the second direction.

  In the gaming machine D5, a base member on which the operating element is displaceably disposed, a guide portion formed on one of the base member or the operating element, and formed on the other of the base member or the operating element. A guided portion that is guided along the guide portion, and the guided portion is guided along the guide portion so that the operation element is displaced at least from the first position to the second position. A gaming machine D6 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, a base member in which the operating element is displaceably disposed, a guide portion formed on one of the base member or the operating element, and the base member or the operation A guided portion that is formed along the guide portion and that is guided along the guide portion, and the guided portion is guided along the guide portion, so that the operating element is displaced from at least the first position to the second position. Therefore, the structure can be simplified. Further, in the operation in the first direction and the operation in the second direction (for example, linear motion and rotation), the guide portion (guide surface) on which the guided portion is guided can be made different. As a result, for example, the shape of the guide portion (guide surface) can be changed to change the displacement mode and the operation feeling of the operation element.

  In the gaming machine D6, the front surface of the operation element is disposed at a position overlapping the rotation shaft in a direction view of the rotation shaft in one of the operation in the first direction or the operation in the second direction. A gaming machine D7.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6, the front surface of the operating element is located at a position overlapping the rotation axis when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation in one of the operation in the first direction or the operation in the second direction. Therefore, when the operation element is pushed in, it is difficult to form a force component in a direction in which the operation element is inclined with respect to the rotation axis. Therefore, the operator that has been pushed in can be moved straight smoothly.

  In the gaming machine D6 or D7, in the direction view orthogonal to the rotation axis of rotation in one of the operation in the first direction or the operation in the second direction, the opposing side surfaces of the operation element respectively overlap with the rotation axis. A gaming machine D8, which is arranged.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6 or D7, the game machine D8 is operated at a position overlapping the rotation axis in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of rotation in one of the operation in the first direction or the operation in the second direction. Since the opposing side faces of the child are respectively disposed, the opposing side face of the operator can be used as a handle, and the operator can be easily rotated by grasping the opposite side face.

<Concept of Invention with Displacement Unit 300 (Operation Unit 320) as an Example>
In a gaming machine having an operation element that is operated and displaced in one direction by a player, a first operation and a second operation different from the first operation are formed in the operation element by the operation in the one direction. A gaming machine E1 that is characterized by being played.

  Here, a gaming machine provided with an operator is known (for example, JP-A-2017-29609). Examples of the operation element include a button that can be pressed and a lever that can be rotated.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine illustrated above, the operation element has only one operation formed by an operation in one direction, and there is a problem that it is difficult to give interest to the operation of the operation element.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the first operation and the second operation different from the first operation are formed in the operation element by the operation in one direction, the operation of the operation element is interesting. be able to.

  The operation in one direction includes, for example, a pushing operation for pressing the operating element, a pulling out (pulling) operation for pulling the operating element, a tilting operation for tilting the operating element, a sliding operation for sliding the operating element, and a rotation of the operating element. Examples include a rotation operation and an operation combining these operations. In addition, as modes of the first operation and the second operation, for example, an operation that moves along a straight line (linear displacement), an operation that moves along a curve (curve displacement), an operation that rotates around an axis, The operation | movement etc. which perform the displacement which combined the displacement are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine E1, the gaming machine E2 is characterized in that at least one aspect of the first action or the second action is changed during the operation in the one direction.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, at least one aspect of the first action or the second action is changed during the operation in one direction. Can be given.

  As an aspect of the gaming machine E2, for example, as a first aspect, an operation element that performs a linear displacement operation (first operation) and a rotation operation (second operation) by a push-in operation (operation in one direction) is used. A mode in which the rotation direction of the rotation operation (second operation) of the operating element is changed in the reverse direction (for example, from the right rotation to the left rotation) in the middle of the pushing operation is the second mode. As an aspect of the above, an operation in which a linear displacement (first operation) and a rotation operation (second operation) are formed in the operation element by a push-in operation (operation in one direction), and the push-in operation is performed. A mode in which the amount of rotation (rotation angle) of the operating element per unit pressing amount of the pressing operation is increased or decreased (including one in which the amount of rotation becomes 0) is a third mode. Operation that moves linearly (operation in one direction) 1 operation) and a rotating operation (second operation) are formed in the operating element, and during the rotating operation, the linear displacement amount of the operating element per unit rotation angle of the rotating operation increases or Each mode of reduction (including the case where the linear displacement amount becomes 0) is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the gaming machine E3 is characterized in that one of the first action and the second action is not formed during the operation in the one direction.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, one of the first action and the second action is not formed during the operation in one direction. Can be given.

  Note that the middle of the operation in one direction may be any timing within the range of the operation. That is, one of the first operation and the second operation may not be formed before or after the first operation and the second operation are formed.

  Therefore, as an aspect of the gaming machine E3, for example, as a first aspect, in the first half of the push-in operation (operation in one direction), a linear displacement operation (first operation) and a rotation operation (second operation) In the second half of the push-in operation, only the linear displacement operation (first operation) is formed on the operation device, and the rotation operation (second operation) is not formed. In the first half of the push-in operation (operation in one direction), only the linear displacement operation (first operation) is formed on the operation element, and the rotation operation (second operation) is not formed. In the latter half of the above, an aspect in which an operation that linearly displaces (first operation) and a rotation operation (second operation) are formed on the operation element is illustrated.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the operating element includes a base member that is displaceably disposed, and the operating element is connected to the base member guided by the base member and rotatably connected to the base member. A gaming machine E4 comprising an operated member to be operated by a player.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E3, the operating element includes a base member that is displaceably arranged, and the operating element is rotated by the base member guided by the base member. Since it is provided with a member to be operated that is connected and can be operated by a player, the operational feeling when operating the member to be operated can be improved.

  For example, in a mode in which a linear displacement operation (first operation) and a rotation operation (second operation) are formed in the operation element by a pushing operation (operation in one direction), the second operation (rotation) is performed. With the formation, the operator is rotated with respect to the palm of the operator. For this reason, the palm of the hand is rubbed by the operation element, resulting in a decrease in operational feeling.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E4, since the operated member is rotatably connected to the base member, an operation of linear displacement (first operation) and rotation by pushing operation (operation in one direction) The operation (second operation) to be performed can be formed on the base member, while the operated member can be prevented from rotating with respect to the player's palm. Therefore, the feeling of operation can be improved by suppressing the palm from being rubbed by the operation element.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, a base member on which the operation element is displaceably disposed, a guide portion formed on one of the base member or the operation element, the base member or the operation element And a guided portion guided along the guide portion, and the guided portion is guided along the guide portion to displace the operation element. Machine E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, a base member in which the operating element is displaceably disposed, and a guide portion formed on one of the base member or the operating element, A guided portion formed on the other of the base member or the operating element and guided along the guiding portion, and the guided portion is guided along the guiding portion so that the operating element is displaced. The structure can be simplified while the first operation and the second operation can be simultaneously formed.

<Concept of Invention with Displacement Unit 300 (Operation Unit 320) as an Example>
In a gaming machine including a base member and a displacement member disposed to be displaceable on the base member, a guided portion formed on one of the base member or the displacement member, and the base member or the displacement member And a guide part that guides the guided part, wherein the guided part is guided in different areas of the guide part according to a displacement state of the displacement member. Game machine F1.

  Here, a base member and a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable are provided, and a pin protruding from the displacement member slides along a groove formed in the base member. A gaming machine that defines a displacement mode of a displacement member is known (for example, JP2012-130539A).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine exemplified above, since the same area is guided regardless of the displacement state of the displacement member, there is a problem that the load is concentrated in the area and the durability is lowered.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine F1 includes a guided portion formed on one of the base member or the displacement member and a guide portion formed on the other of the base member or the displacement member for guiding the guided portion. Since the guide portion is guided in different regions of the guide portion according to the displacement state of the displacement member, the region that receives the load can be dispersed, and the load can be prevented from being concentrated in some regions. As a result, durability can be improved.

  In addition, as a displacement state of a displacement member, the direction of the displacement member, the aspect of the external force which acts on a displacement member, etc. are illustrated, for example.

  In the gaming machine F1, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and the region of the guide portion where the guided portion is guided is the displacement member is the first position. The gaming machine F2 is different between a case where the displacement member is displaced from the second position to the first position and a case where the displacement member is displaced from the second position to the first position.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable between the first position and the second position, and the area of the guide part where the guided part is guided is Since the case where the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position is different from the case where the displacement member is displaced from the second position to the first position, it is possible to disperse the region receiving the load, and to some regions Concentration of load can be suppressed. As a result, durability can be improved.

  As described above, when the displacement member reciprocates between the first position and the second position, the displacement member is alternately displaced between the forward path and the backward path. Is made different between the forward path and the return path of the displacement member, so that the region receiving the load can be efficiently dispersed. As a result, it is particularly effective for improving durability.

  In the gaming machine F1 or 2, the displacement member is formed so as to be operable by a player in either the first direction or the second direction different from the first direction, and the guided portion is guided. The area of the guide portion is different between the case where the displacement member is operated in the first direction and the case where the displacement member is operated in the second direction.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the displacement member is formed so that the player can operate in either the first direction or the second direction different from the first direction. The area of the guide part where the guided part is guided is different between when the displacement member is operated in the first direction and when the displacement member is operated in the second direction. , It is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated in some areas. As a result, durability can be improved.

  As described above, when the displacement member is formed as an operator operated by the player and can be operated in either the first direction or the second direction different from the first direction, the gaming state The direction of the operation is selected according to the same, and the same operation (operation direction) is difficult to repeat. Therefore, the area of the guide part where the guided part is guided is divided into the operation in the first direction and the operation in the second direction By making them different, the load receiving area can be efficiently distributed. As a result, it is particularly effective for improving durability.

  The gaming machine F2 includes a first member and a second member, and the guide portion is a region in which the guided portion is guided when the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position. Is formed in the first member, and a region in which the guided portion is guided when the displacement member is displaced from the second position to the first position is formed in the second member. Game machine F4 to do.

  The gaming machine F3 includes a first member and a second member, and the guide portion has a region where the guided portion is guided when the displacement member is operated in the first direction. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that a region where the guided portion is guided when the displacement member is operated in the second direction is formed in the second member.

  According to the gaming machine F4 or F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2 or F3, the guide portion is covered when the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position or operated in the first direction. An area in which the guide portion is guided is formed in the first member, and an area in which the guided portion is guided when the displacement member is displaced from the second position to the first position or when operated in the second direction. Since it is formed in two members, the replacement cost can be reduced.

  That is, when the guide part is formed on one member, it is necessary to replace the entire one member even if damage or wear occurs in a part of the region of the guide part. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F4 or F5, when damage or wear occurs in a part of the region, only one member (one of the first member or the second member) that forms the region is replaced. All that is necessary is to replace one member. Therefore, the replacement cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In addition, by forming the guide portion from the first member and the second member in this way, when only one region is likely to be damaged or worn, one member (the first member or the second member) that forms the region. Only the material of one of the members can be a material having higher durability than the other member (the other of the first member or the second member). Thereby, durability can be improved, reducing material cost.

<About the concept of the invention taking the displacement unit 300 (guide unit 350) as an example>
In a gaming machine including a first member on which a guided portion is projected and a second member having a groove-shaped guide portion that guides the guided portion, the second member includes a base member and a base member thereof. A gaming machine G1 comprising a connecting member connected to a member, wherein the guide member is formed by the base member and the connecting member.

  Here, a base member and a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable are provided, and a pin protruding from the displacement member slides along a groove formed in the base member. A gaming machine that defines a displacement mode of a displacement member is known (for example, JP2012-130539A).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine exemplified above, when other members are present when assembling the base member and the displacement member, they can be assembled while avoiding interference with the other members (pins are inserted into the grooves). It may be necessary. In this case, since it is necessary to work while avoiding interference with other members, the shapes of the displacement member, the base member, and other members are limited, and the degree of freedom in design is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the second member includes a base member and a connecting member connected to the base member, and the guide member is formed by the base member and the connecting member. Or after arrange | positioning the 1st member to one side of a connection member, the other of a base member or a connection member can be connected to one side, and the whole can be assembled. Therefore, it is difficult to cause interference with other members. As a result, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

  In the gaming machine G1, the guide portion includes a guide surface along a direction in which the guided portion is guided, and a terminal surface that defines a terminal end in the direction in which the guided portion is guided, and the base member and the connecting member The game machine G2 is characterized in that a boundary between the terminal surface and the terminal surface and the guide surface is formed.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the guide unit includes a guide surface along the direction for guiding the guided portion and a termination surface for defining the end in the direction for guiding the guided portion. Since the boundary between the base member and the connecting member is formed at the terminal surface or the connecting portion between the terminal surface and the guide surface, the boundary where the step is likely to be formed due to dimensional tolerance or assembly tolerance is guided. Can be avoided. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of impact and wear when the guided part passes through the step. As a result, the guided portion can be smoothly displaced and the durability can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the guide portion includes a guide surface along a direction in which the guided portion is guided, and a terminal surface that defines a terminal end in a direction in which the guided portion is guided. A gaming machine comprising a first guide surface and a second guide surface arranged to face each other, wherein the first guide surface is formed by the base member, and the second guide surface is formed by the connecting member. G3.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the guide unit includes a guide surface along the direction in which the guided unit is guided, and a termination surface that defines a termination in the direction in which the guided unit is guided. The guide surface includes a first guide surface and a second guide surface that are arranged to face each other, the first guide surface is formed by a base member, and the second guide surface is formed by a connecting member. The guide surface and the second guide surface can be formed from different members. As a result, the respective materials can be made different according to the characteristics required for the first guide surface and the second guide surface. Moreover, when changing the shape of a 1st guide surface or a 2nd guide surface, it is only necessary to change one member, and it becomes unnecessary to change the whole.

  In the gaming machine G3, the end surface defines a first end surface that defines one end in the direction in which the guided portion is guided, and a second end that defines the other end in the direction in which the guided portion is guided. A gaming machine G4, characterized in that the first end surface and the second end surface are formed by one of the base member or the connecting member.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G3, the termination surface includes a first termination surface that defines one end of the guided portion in the direction in which the guided portion is guided, and a direction in which the guided portion is guided. A second end surface defining the end of the side, and the first end surface and the second end surface are formed by one of the base member or the connecting member. , Parts replacement costs can be reduced. That is, the surface (part) that defines the end in the direction of guiding the guided part is easily damaged because the guided part is collided, and when the surface (part) that defines the end is damaged, It is only necessary to replace one of the base member or the connecting member, and it is unnecessary to replace the whole.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the periphery of the outer surface formed along the first direction of the first member is surrounded by the second member, and the guided portion protrudes from the outer surface of the first member. The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that the guide portion is formed on an inner surface of the connecting member, and the base member and the connecting member are divided in the first direction.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the periphery of the outer surface formed along the first direction of the first member is surrounded by the second member, and the guided portion is The guide member is formed on the inner surface of the connecting member, and the base member and the connecting member are divided in the first direction, so that the base member and the connecting member are continuously formed (annular). ) Therefore, since the guide part for guiding the guided part is formed, the rigidity of the members (base member and connecting member) that require rigidity can be improved. Further, the guide member can be easily formed (die-cut) by being divided into the base member and the connecting member.

  In the gaming machine G3 or G4, the first member is formed to be displaceable from a first position to a second position by a player's operation, and the first member is moved from the first position by an operation in the first direction. When displaced to the second position, the guided portion is guided by the first guide surface, and the first member is moved to the first direction by an operation in a second direction that is different from the first direction. The gaming machine G6, wherein the guided portion is guided by the second guide surface when displaced from one position to the second position.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G3 or G4, the first member is formed to be displaceable from the first position to the second position by the player's operation, and the first member is operated by the operation in the first direction. When one member is displaced from the first position to the second position, the guided portion is guided by the first guide surface, and the first member is moved by the operation in the second direction, which is a direction different from the first direction. When displaced from the first position to the second position, the guided portion is guided by the second guide surface, so that it depends on the type of operation direction (operation in the first direction or operation in the second direction). A (suitable) guide surface (shape or material) can be adopted. Thereby, for example, the operational feeling can be made different by making the shapes and materials of the first guide surface and the second guide surface different. Alternatively, a material with high wear resistance and impact resistance should be used on the side where wear is generated and the impact input is large, while a low-cost material is used on the side where wear is generated and the impact input is small. Improvement of durability and reduction of product cost can be achieved.

  A gaming machine K1 in which the gaming machine is a slot machine in any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B5, C1 to C11, D1 to D8, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, and G1 to G6 . Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B5, C1 to C11, D1 to D8, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, and G1 to G6, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine K2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B5, C1 to C11, D1 to D8, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, and G1 to G6, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine A gaming machine K3 characterized by being. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Slot machines (gaming machines)
300 Displacement unit (operator)
310 Ring member (base member)
320, 8320, 10320 Operation unit (operator, displacement member, first member)
330, 10330 Grip unit (operator, displacement member)
10335 Operator (operator, base member, displacement member)
10336 Connecting member (operator, operated member, displacement member)
340, 8340 Rotation unit (operator, displacement member, first member)
342 Rear side member (displacement member, first member)
343 Shaft member (guided part)
344 Guided member (guided part)
350, 8350, 9350, 11350, 12350, 13350, 14350, 15350 Guide unit (base member, second member)
351, 8351, 9351, 11351, 12351, 13351, 14351, 15351 Guide grooves (guide portions)
351a First guide surface (guide surface, end surface, first guide surface, second guide surface, first end surface, second end surface)
351b, 14351b, 15351b Second guide surface (guide surface, first guide surface, second guide surface)
351c, 8351c Third guide surface (guide surface, first guide surface, second guide surface)
351d Fourth guide surface (guide surface, first guide surface, second guide surface)
351e, 12351e First end (termination surface, first termination surface, second termination surface)
351f, 13351f, 14351f Second end (termination surface, first termination surface, second termination surface)
11351g 5th guide surface (guide surface, terminal surface, 1st guide surface, 2nd guide surface, 1st terminal surface, 2nd terminal surface)
11351h 6th guide surface (guide surface, 1st guide surface, 2nd guide surface)
14351i, 15351i Third end (termination surface, first termination surface, second termination surface)
9351k Back side recessed portion (guide surface, terminal surface, first guide surface, second guide surface, first terminal surface, second terminal surface)
8351m housing (termination surface, first termination surface, second termination surface)
360, 11360 Front side guide unit (first member, second member, base member, connecting member)
362 second annular member (first member, second member, base member, connecting member)
370 Rear side guide unit (first member, second member, base member, connecting member)
391, 2391, 3391, 4391, 5391, 6391, 7391 Base unit (base member)
392, 2392, 3392, 4392, 5392, 6392, 7392 Base member (base member)
392a, 2392a, 3392a, 4392a, 5392a, 6392a, 7392a Base plate (base member)
5392a2 Sliding groove (opening)
392d1, 2392d1, 3392d1, 4392d1 Inner first engagement piece (holding means, protrusion)
392d2 Inner second engagement piece (holding means, protrusion)
3392d3 inner first locking portion (elastic portion, engaging portion)
3392d4 Inner second locking portion (elastic portion, engaging portion)
392e1, 2392e1 outer first engagement piece (holding means, protrusion)
392e2, 2392e2 Outside second engagement piece (holding means, protrusion)
3392e3, 4392e3 outer first locking portion (elastic portion, engaging portion)
3392e4, 4392e4 outer second locking portion (elastic portion, engaging portion)
392f, 2392f, 3392f, 6392f, 7392f Restricting piece (holding means, elastic part, engaging piece)
393 Leaf spring (first member)
393a Protrusion (collision part)
395, 2395, 4395, 5395, 7395 Displacement unit (displacement member, rack, operator)
396, 2396, 4396, 5396 First displacement member (displacement member, rack, operation element, first member)
396d1, 2396d1 inner first recessed portion (recessed portion)
396d2, 2396d2 Inner second recessed portion (concave portion)
396e, 2396e Outer recessed portion (recessed portion)
5396m collar (elastic part, engaging part)
397, 7397 Second displacement member (displacement member)

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine having an operation element formed to be displaceable from a first position to a second position by a player's operation,
The operation element is displaced from the first position to the second position in any of the operation in the first direction or the operation in the second direction, which is a direction different from the first direction. A gaming machine characterized by The operation element is formed to be displaceable from the second position to the third position,
The operation element is displaced from the second position to the third position by the operation in the second direction,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein in the operation in the first direction, displacement of the operation element from the second position to the third position is restricted. The operation element is formed to be displaceable from the second position to the third position,
The operation element is displaced from the second position to the third position by an operation in the third direction, which is a direction different from both the first direction and the second direction,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein in the operation in the first direction and the second direction, displacement of the operation element from the second position to the third position is restricted.

Images